Home

Schematics User's Guide - Del-UFMS

1. Schematic Page Printed Paper Figure 4 11 Zoom Factor Set to 100 with Printer Configured in Portrait Mode Printing Your Design 4 67 With the zoom factor set to 200 a B size drawing will print on eight sheets of paper as shown in Figure 4 12 Doubling the zoom factor quadruples the number of printer pages needed to print a schematic A size A size A size A size B size gt A size A sizel A size A size Schematic Page Printed Paper Figure 4 12 Zoom Factor Set to 200 with Printer Configured in Portrait Mode With user definable zoom enabled the printer configured in portrait mode and a 100 zoom factor as shown in Figure 4 13 e An A size schematic will print on two sheets of A size paper e AB size schematic will print on two sheets of A size paper 4 68 Creating and Editing Designs 11x 81 2 Schematic Page A size gt gt B size 17x 11 Schematic Page 812x118 12x11 Printed Paper 81 2x11 81 2x 11 Printed Paper Figure 4 13 User definable Zoom Enabled in Portrait Mode In landscape mode using a 100 zoom factor as shown in Figure 4 14 e An Assize schematic will print on one sheet of A size paper e A B size drawing will print on four sheets of A size paper A size _ A size 11x 8 1 2 11x 8 1 2 Schematic Page Printed P
2. 0 6 40 Specifying Information for Multi gate Components 6 41 Specifying Which Pins Can Be Swapped 6 43 Creating Components With Multiple Gate Types 6 44 Deleting a Package Definition gt s secs o o 6 45 Configuring Package Typ S s s cocs sig soo a Soot ds ad 6 46 Configuring Custom Libraries s s ess cas o e duny s 6 48 Example Creating Symbols from Scratch aoaaa 6 50 Diode Bridge Rectifier 2 sok 4 see debe ed e A a 6 50 Opening or Creating a Symbol Library 6 51 Drawing tbe Graphis 24 4224 48448 0464 88 stadet 6 52 Placing PIS s o 4 4 4 0 ch 4 nfo 0 et ag Se A RE Os 6 53 Finishing Touches e nc e chad 24 eee oe oad amp na 6 54 Setting the Attributes a soea aiaa oR ER eH a 6 55 Contigurimo the Models scs e ecs dor Bak he Gera BR as 6 56 Creating and Editing Hierarchical Designs OVEIVIOW 3 2 et tb Awe ae HOSE A oh OSS Se oH OES 7 1 Hierarchical Design Methods o o e e 7 3 Creating and Editing Hierarchical Blocks 7 4 Associating an Existing Schematic o o 7 8 Creating and Editing Hierarchical Symbols 7 9 Creating a Hierarchical Symbol o ooo 7 9 Converting Hierarchical Blocks to Symbols 7 11 Using Interface Ports 2 424 2 60 28 chee ea OE Oe 7 12 Setting Up Multiple Views s cor eaea wh oS a eee eG Sa
3. 4 26 Creating Custom Power and Ground Symbols 4 27 Using Wires and BUSES 2 sos sioan 4 4 Gdns had bade HSE Gee iS 4 28 Drawing and Labeling Wires o o 4 28 Drawing and Labeling Buses s e cos 20g ack cameo ed ew ws 4 30 Automatically Labeling Wires and Buses 4 32 Specifying Drawing Options es poeb d mea sod 4 33 Orthogonality ss ege paneas tepi aa di ed ewe Oh OS 4 33 Snap to Grid eo aoe aa nae a AA a E 4 34 SHaptos PIN e ada Asie Sad A we ee Se es 4 34 GIaVLY so he A So A PE RA Be BH ae GS 4 34 GndSpacile corte 4 35 Rubberbandinge s e sea 6464463 8h 8 A 4 35 Usine POTS oc e saps panee sok apine eee ER cs Gm Gs oe 4 38 Off Page Ports e ea s awa poaa EE ee ER RE ae Oa ES 4 38 Global POMS s 6 3 mos Hans SE ae DS ES axe A S 4 38 Selecting and Moving Objects and Attributes 4 40 SElECUAS re sestane as tn a a Gok ee ea amp a 4 40 MOVING do ado sio a a e 4 41 Searching for and Selecting Parts s e o eas moce a o o 4 41 Cutting Copying and Pastidg o e 4 43 CUMIN oa mr a the a a A we a 4 43 Copy ga 2 dee NSS eG A A AA 4 43 Pasting foe hd ba CRA GES SREY EUS eS PER DD ES SE oS 4 43 Delenme z ar bobs 2 oon a a et A he dos YEE Aes e 4 44 Undo Redo iba sisas rs rra 4 44 Copying t the Clipboard ecos s aera pae asoka suno ky as 4 45 Creating and Editing Title Blocks aoaaa 4 46 Editing Page
4. che Ios Ma Translators dialog box Display Options Page Size Auto Bepeat Auto Naming Translator View Editor Configuration PSPICE PSPICE Display Preferences ee SPIC Pan amp Zoom ILIN Restricted Operations Translators OK Cancel 2 Select a Translator from the list or type a name in the Translator text box Type the name of the view in the View text box Click Apply Click OK A Apply Navigating Through Hierarchical Designs 7 15 Navigating Through Hierarchical Designs The Navigate menu has functions that enable you to move between pages create new pages delete pages and copy pages You can move within a hierarchical design using functions from the Navigate menu You can push into a block from the schematic move up and down in hierarchical levels and identify the hierarchical path of a selected symbol Moving down in a hierarchy 1 Select the hierarchical block or symbol 2 From the Navigate menu select Push a Ifthe selected item is represented by only one lower level schematic the schematic will display for editing b Ifthe selected item represents more than one schematic that is has multiple views you can select the view to be edited in a dialog box that will appear Moving up in a hierarchy 1 From the Navigate menu select Pop If you have made any changes to the present level in the hierarchy you are prompted to save the modifications or to mo
5. V Enable Auto Increment Label Template 10 Cancel Shortcut press Ctri E 4 24 Creating and Editing Designs Replace Part x Target Part Replacement fl T Keep Attribute Values Selected Parts Only Current Page Only C All Pages Cancel Replacing Parts A single part on a schematic may be replaced easily In addition all parts of a given type on a page or all pages of a multi page design may be replaced Instead of having to delete one part find another in a library and place the new part you can replace the old with the new in one operation Replacing a single part Select the part to be replaced From the Edit menu select Replace to display the Replace Part dialog box Note that Target Part is unavailable because you have already selected a part and don t need to specify one in the dialog box In the Replacement text box type the name of the replacement part If you want the attribute values of the part being replaced applied to the replacement parts select the Keep Attribute Values check box Click OK The selected part is replaced Replacing multiple parts in a selected set 1 Select the group of parts to be replaced See Selecting more than one object on page 4 40 From the Edit menu select Replace to display the Replace Part dialog box In the Replacement text box type the name of the replacement parts If you want the attribute values of the pa
6. Design Journal Help on page 9 3 describes where to find Design Journal Help 9 2 Using Design Journal Acheckpoint schematic is a copy of the schematic you are working on in its current stage of development If the first checkpoint schematic isn t changed it preserves the state of the working schematic at the point the first checkpoint schematic was created Understanding Design Journal Design Journal is a very powerful analysis and tracking tool With it you can e document stages of development e perform what if analysis on your current schematic while preserving the integrity of the original e compare the results of one or more what if scenarios to the original schematic output by simulating in PSpice A D and viewing the results in Probe e create a record of modifications that you may or may not have implemented e capture the thought process of a design e easily revert back to an earlier design stage These functions are available to you as you create checkpoint schematics a copy of the current state of the schematic you are working on Each checkpoint schematic is stored in a separate subdirectory within the directory of the working schematic Checkpoint schematics are named Checkpoint xxx where xxx is a Sequential number starting with 001 Figure 9 1 depicts a working schematic and two checkpoint schematics The first checkpoint schematic is a copy of the working schematic The second checkpoint sc
7. A check mark in the check box indicates that the grid is enabled 3 Click OK Stay on Grid Stay on grid controls the method of object placement When Stay on Grid is enabled the objects are forced onto grid when placed We recommend that you enable this so that electrical connections are made correctly Enabling or disabling stay on grid Select Display Options from the Options menu 2 Select or clear the Stay on Grid check box to enable or disable Stay on Grid 3 Click OK Changing Grid and Gravity 5 17 Snap to Grid Snap to grid controls the movement of the object while being The Stay on Grid command moved for placement If Snap to Grid and Stay on Grid are must be enabled for the Snap to both enabled movement during object placement is in Grid command to be effective increments equal to the current grid spacing If Snap to Grid or Stay on Grid is not selected the object moves smoothly Enabling or disabling snap to grid 1 From the Options menu select Display Options r Options 2 Select or clear the Snap to Grid check box to enable or M gid On A Era ans disable snap to grid M CursorxandY M Stay on Grid 3 Click OK Grid Spacing 0010 in Gravity 00 03 in M Text Stay On Grid Spacing 00 02 in Cancel Grid Spacing Grid Spacing defines the horizontal and vertical grid spacing on your drawing area The default spacing is 10 units This correspond
8. Creating and Editing Title Blocks 4 49 Using a Custom Title Block Symbol After you have created a custom title block you have to specify that block in order to use it in the current schematic Specifying a new title block symbol 1 From the Options menu select Editor Configuration to display the Editor Configuration dialog box see 3 18 2 Inthe Title Block Symbol text box type the name of the title block symbol 3 Click OK 4 50 Creating and Editing Designs he MicroSim Schematics program enables you to enter and edit multiple lines of text directly on your schematic The text will wrap as it is entered however you must resize the text box to view text that flows beyond its bottom boundary Adding Non Electrical Information Non electrical information such as comments tables and graphics can be added to the schematic There are three types of non electrical information e text multiple lines or a single line such as comments or instructions e graphics lines circles and arcs e annotation symbols Text Multiple Line Text Editing With the multiple line text option you can enter text at any location on the schematic by creating an editable resizable text box This is the best way to add more than one line of text to a schematic The text properties can be changed to specify the font color point size and frame of the text box Drawing the text box 1 From the Edit menu sele
9. Drawing Symbol Graphics 6 15 Filling Shapes Shapes that have been drawn using either the schematic editor or the symbol editor may be filled with color In the symbol editor you can fill circles rectangles and polylines Use the Graphics Properties dialog box to change properties on an instance basis but use the Display Preferences dialog box to set the defaults of those properties see Changing Graphics Properties on page 4 55 Filling a shape after it has been drawn 1 Select one or more shapes to fill 2 From the Edit menu select Graphics Properties You can also double click shapes to display the Graphics Properties dialog box Eater Arrowhead Width z Style v Style Size gt Fil Type Using defaults for layer Symbols Cancel Restore Defaults 3 Select a color width and line style for the frame of the Note Polylines do not have to graphic be closed to be filled Select a color to fill the shape with Click OK If you decide you don t want to apply the changes you have made click the Restore Defaults button to restore the settings selected in the Display Preferences dialog box The Restore Defaults button works at any time before closing the dialog box or after re entering it 6 16 Creating and Editing Symbols r Example Object number one was in front of two and three but the Send to Back operation moved it behind objec
10. For each device to be assigned a package type the packager will go through the package classes in the order listed and assign the first package type defined for that device which belongs to that class However if only one package type is defined for the package it will be used whether it is in the list or not Setting up priorities 1 From the Tools menu select Package to display the Package dialog box shown on 11 8 2 Click Setup Priorities to display the Setup Package Class Priorities dialog box Package Classes Class Priorities piP Add POFP DISCRETE Cancel 3 If you want to add a package class to the Class Priorities list select a class from the Package Classes list and click Add The package class is added to the end of the Class Priorities list 4 Ifyou want to delete a class priority select a class from the Class Priorities list then click Delete Packaging the Parts in Your Design 11 11 If you want to insert a class into the Class Priorities list first select a class from the Package Classes list then select an item in the Class Priorities list and click Insert The package class is added to the list before the item selected in the Class Priorities list Click OK In the Package dialog box click OK 11 12 Preparing Your Design for Board Layout If you select a part in the Part Browser and the name you select is an alias electrically equivalent of the basic symbol name the par
11. Package and Assign Reference Designators Assign Reference Designators Only Setup Priorities Undo Packaging DIP ba Set Values for A Starting Designator 1 All Except UserAssigned Page Increment D C Only Unpackaged Cal Level Increment 0 Cancel 2 Inthe Set Values for area click the All Except User Assigned option button Any manually assigned reference designator values and gates will be kept 3 Click OK Packaging the Parts in Your Design 11 9 Assigning Reference Designators Automatically Use the Package selection from the Tools menu to package individual parts into physical packages Packaging and assigning reference designators 1 From the Tools menu select Package to display the Package dialog box shown on 11 8 In the Function area click the Package and Assign Reference Designators Only button In the Set Values for area click one of the three option buttons to specify which parts will have either reference designator or package information or both assigned a Choose All Except User Assigned to restrict the function to those attributes that you have not manually assigned b Choose Only Unpackaged to restrict the function to values for reference designator gate and package type attributes that have not been assigned Cc Choose All to give the function unrestricted access to all parts overriding user assigned attribute values If you want to change the pa
12. Selecting a part by description 1 Click the Get New Part button to display the Part Browser dialog box see 4 6 Note You may display one of two Part Browser dialog 2 boxes the Part Browser Advanced or the Part Browser Basic If the Part Browser Basic dialog box appears click Advanced to display the Part Browser Advanced dialog box You can only use the Part Browser Advanced dialog box to search for a part by description In the Description Search text box type a description of the part Click the arrow and select one of the options in the list e Create New Part List creates a new sub list of parts in the parts list e Add to Part List adds to the set of parts e Search within Part List restricts the search to the partial list of parts Click Search The number of items found in the search is shown beneath the parts list The search function searches all configured symbol libraries for parts whose descriptions match the description entered When the search is complete all parts with matching descriptions are shown in the partial list at the left of the dialog box Select the part from the parts list Preview a part symbol by clicking the part name in the parts list Finding Parts 4 7 When typing a description you can use the and wildcard characters Search Y Library C msim Vib OPAMP sib pz p1 Vec Ve Vec COMP 7 13 0472
13. Right click to stop placing parts Saving Your Work Click the File Save button or select Save or Save As from the File menu to save the schematic If this is a new design you are prompted to enter a file name where the new schematic will be saved Using Design Manager Overview This chapter provides introductory information about the Design Manager This chapter has the following sections Understanding Design Manager on page 2 2 describes the purpose and uses for Design Manager Managing Your Files in the Workspace on page 2 4 explains what a workspace is and how to manage your files within it Design Manager Functions on page 2 5 describes Design Manager functions and activities Starting the Design Manager on page 2 7 describes how to start the Design Manager Design Manager Help on page 2 7 describes where to find Design Manager Help 2 2 Using Design Manager Understanding Design Manager Design Manager allows you to browse manage archive and restore your design files When you open a design file Design Manager searches the Windows Explorer for the following information e the name of the top level folder where the file is stored e the names of all files within the top level folder and its sub folders e the names of files in folders outside the top level folder that are linked to files within the top level folder Design Manager gathers this information arranges and displays i
14. Toolbar Toolbar buttons provide shortcuts for performing common actions To enable or disable the Toolbar display 1 From the View menu select Toolbar EW O E E _ aoe sree He A check mark next to the Toolbar menu item indicates that In Cul the toolbar is displayed Out Ctrl O Area Ctrl Table 5 1 Symbol Editor Toolbar Buttons Entire Symbol Redraw Ctrl L 4 Ponto Non Caniat Buttons Name Function Page New File creates a new symbol file 5 5 Open File opens an existing symbol file 5 5 LS Save File saves the active symbol file 5 6 Zoom In views smaller area of the 3 42 ba symbol Zoom Out views a larger area of the 3 42 symbol Zoom Area views a selected area of the 3 44 symbol Zoom to Fit fits the symbol view to the 3 44 Symbol page Draw Arc draws an arc shape on the 6 10 symbol a Draw Box draws a box on the symbol 6 11 Ol Draw Circle draws a circle on the symbol 6 11 Table 5 1 Symbol Editor Toolbar Buttons Buttons Name Draw Polyline ra Place Pins C a4 Draw Text Ra Insert Picture Edit Attributes Get New Part New Symbol Redraw Mau a Function draws a polyline or line on the symbol places pins on the symbol places a text string on the symbol imports a bitmap bmp dib or Windows metafiles wmf emf edit the attributes of a symbol gets a symbol from a symbol library for editing starts the Sym
15. labeled incrementally in the order selected as CLK O CLK 1 CLK 2 and so on Click OK Select the first wire to be labeled Shortcut press Ctrl E From the Edit menu select Label to label the wire N Oo RA To label each of the remaining wires in the series a Select the wire b Press Space Using Wires and Buses 4 33 Specifying Drawing Options Several options aid in drawing wires and buses and in placing parts e The Orthogonal option constrains wires and buses to vertical and horizontal lines e The Snap to Grid option keeps parts wires and buses aligned to grid lines e The Snap to Pin option constrains wire and bus placements to the nearest pin e The Rubberband option maintains connectivity between parts when they are moved Orthogonality Orthogonal allows wires and buses to be drawn only as horizontal and vertical lines Figure 4 3 illustrates two resistors connected by a wire drawn with Orthogonal enabled The wire was drawn by clicking at the bottom of R1 and moving directly to R2 and clicking again The wire was drawn by vertical and horizontal lines even though the movement of the pointer was diagonal Figure 4 3 Orthogonal Wire Drawing 4 34 Creating and Editing Designs Enabling orthogonal drawing From the Options menu select Display Options 2 In the Options frame select or clear the Orthogonal check box to enable or disable orthogonality 3 Click OK
16. Auto Repeat Auto Naming Editor Configuration When panning click the right mouse button to pan immediately rather than waiting for the pan time to elapse 3 46 Using the Schematic Editor Setting Auto Pan sensitivity The Auto Pan sensitivity setting determines how long the pointer must remain on the window border before the panning takes place 1 3 From the Options menu click Pan amp Zoom to display the Pan amp Zoom dialog box shown on page 3 45 In the Auto Pan frame type a value in the Sensitivity text box The value in the text box is the time delay in milliseconds The default is 1000 milliseconds Click OK Setting Pan Coarse Delta and Fine Delta The Pan parameters determine the degree of movement of the work space when you use the scroll bars 1 From the Options menu click Pan amp Zoom to display the Pan amp Zoom dialog box shown on page 3 45 In the Coarse Delta text box type a value The value in the text box is the degree of movement of the design when you click in a scroll bar on either side of the slider The value must be between 1 and 50 and represents a percentage of the visible work space In the Fine Delta text box type a value Fine Delta defines the percentage of movement of the design when you pan by clicking on one of the scroll bar arrows The value must be between 1 and 5 and represents a percentage of the visible work space Click OK Using
17. Click the pointer where you want to end the bus Right click to stop drawing buses Labeling the bus 1 Double click any segment of the bus to display the Set Attribute Value dialog box Type DB 1 12 in the LABEL text box Click OK Connecting wires to the bus From the Options menu select Auto Repeat to display the Auto Repeat dialog box a Set the Vertical Offset to 00 10 b Ensure that Enable Auto Repeat is enabled c Click OK Click the Draw Wire button and draw a wire from pin 2 of US to the bus Press Space five times to place five more wires Click the Draw Wire button and draw a wire from pin 2 of U6 to the bus Press Space five times to place five more wires Example Drawing a Schematic 1 13 Labeling the wires connected to the bus Note Each wire connecting to a bus must be labeled with You can use Auto Naming to label a uniform collection of i the name of one of the signals wires on the bus 1 From the Options menu select Auto Naming to display the Auto Naming dialog box m Reference Designators _ a In the Wire Port Labels frame select the Enable Auto Wee ores Increment check box Starting Designator No fi b Inthe Label Template text box type DB1 which is the aire i Pi a nable Suto incremen label for the first wire in the series Label Template o B1 Cancel Wires will be labeled incrementally from DB1 and up c Click OK Select
18. disable the grid before copying See Grid On on page 3 29 Copying an area of the schematic to the Windows Clipboard 1 Using a selection rectangle select the area to be copied 2 From the Edit Menu select Copy to Clipboard The area is copied to the Windows Clipboard The copied area remains unchanged on the schematic Importing a schematic into Microsoft Word Before selecting the area to be copied disable the grid If the grid is enabled the grid dots will be copied into the Microsoft Word document 1 From the Options menu select Display Options 2 Inthe Display Options dialog box see 4 34 clear the Grid On check box to disable the grid 3 Copy an area of the schematic to the clipboard as explained in Copying an area of the schematic to the Windows Clipboard on page 4 45 4 In Microsoft Word insert a frame where you want the schematic to be placed 5 Press Ctrl V to paste the contents of the clipboard Edit Menu Draw Navigate View Undo Ctrl Z Cut Ctrl Copy Ctrl C Paste Ctrl Copy to Clipboard 4 46 Creating and Editing Designs Navigate Menu ENTES View Options Analysis Select Page Create Page Delete Page Copy Page Edit Page Info Page Info E Page Title fisolator T Simulation Only Cancel Creating and Editing Title Blocks Each new schematic is created with a title block in the lower right corner of the page The title block is treated as
19. 3 Click OK 4 38 Creating and Editing Designs A third type of port interface port provides connections between the pins of a hierarchical block or symbol and the underlying schematic Refer to Chapter 7 Creating and Editing Hierarchical Designs the section on Using Interface Ports on page 7 12 Using Ports Signals can be connected without using wires or buses by connecting them to global or off page ports and labeling the ports with the same name Off Page Ports Off page ports connect to other off page ports with the same name on the same page or on other pages within the same schematic If you are working on a schematic and you need to connect signals between pages use off page ports _ s OF FPAGE Figure 4 7 Off page Port Global Ports Global ports connect to other global ports of the same name anywhere in the schematic hierarchy The symbol library port s1b contains several port symbols You can also create your own port symbols using the symbol editor GLOBAL 7 BUBBLE Ce EXTERNAL_IN i EXTERNAL_OUT SF EXTERNAL_BI Figure 4 8 Global Ports Placing a global port 1 Click the Get New Part button to display a Part Browser dialog box see 4 6 Click Libraries to display the Library Browser dialog box see 3 19 In the Library list select port s1b In the Part list double click GLOBAL Click Place to place the global port or click Place amp Close to close t
20. 7400 slb 7400 series TTL 74ac slb Advanced CMOS 74act slb TTL compatible Advanced CMOS 74als slb Advanced low power Schottky TTL 74as slb Advanced Schottky TTL 74f slb FAST 74h slb High speed TTL 74hc slb High speed CMOS 74hct slb TTL compatible high speed CMOS 741 slb Low power TTL 741s slb Low power Schottky TTL 74s slb Schottky TTL abm slb Behavioral modeling blocks adv_lin slb Advanced Linear Devices operational amplifiers analog slb Passive and semiconductor primitives Using Symbol Libraries F 3 Table F 1 Symbol Libraries continued Symbol Library File Name Contents analog_p slb anl_misc slb anlg slb anlgl slb anlg2 slb anlg_dev slb apex slb atmel slb bipolar slb breakout slb broktree slb burr_brn slb cd4000 slb chips slb cmos slb comlinr slb Same devices as analog slb with visible pin numbers for R L C R_VAR and C_VAR devices Timers three phase transformer relays CMOS transistor array variable impedance variable admittance time dependent switches Multiplexers DAC ADC voltage to frequency converters DAC ADC sample and hold amplifiers voltage references voltage regulators PWM DAC ADC transceivers Analog Devices Inc operational amplifiers transistor arrays buffers voltage references analog multipliers analog switches Apex Microtechnology Corporation operational amplifiers Atmel Corporation EEPROM PROM SRAM
21. Cancel Add eee Enter a name for the part in the Part Name text box TestCase for example Enter a description of the part in the Description text box Leave the AKO Name text box blank and select Do not display in the Part Browser check box Click OK Saving the symbol to a library 1 2 3 4 From the File menu select Save In the File Name text box type the name of the library Click OK In the Configure dialog box answer Yes to Add to list of Schematics configured libraries Now you can draw a symbol using the procedures given in Drawing Symbol Graphics on page 6 10 and Defining and Editing Pin Types on page 6 23 You have defined this to be a base symbol by leaving the AKO Name text box blank and selecting the Do not display in the Part Browser check box After you have created the base symbol you can create other symbols that reference the base symbol that is AKO symbols Creating New Symbols 6 9 Creating an AKO symbol 4 2 3 4 5 From the Part menu in the symbol editor select New In the Part Name text box type a name for the part In the Description text box type a description of the part In the AKO Name text box type the name of the base symbol or example AKO Test Click OK The symbol graphics of the base symbol display in the symbol editor window Select Save from the File menu to save the custom symbol library 6 10 Creating and Editing Symbols Draw
22. Color Noe width q Style r Fill None I Rounded Comers Using defaults for layer Symbol Text Adding Non Electrical Information 4 53 3 Select the appropriate properties for the text selected Note n addition to changing the text properties you can change the properties of the text box itself in the Frame area 4 Click OK Setting the default text properties through Display Preferences 1 From the Options menu select Display Preferences to display the Display Preferences dialog box Display Preferences Display Layers General Graphics Text Annotation Graphics Attribute Text Font Modem Size 0 12 de 2 048 mm aaa Markers and Viewpoints p Frame Page Boundary Color None Part Names Pin Names 2 Pin Numbers Width y Pins PLSyn Style c Ports Aedes Fit None Selection Simulation Currents 7 Rounded Comers Simulation Voltages Stimulus zl 2 Select one or more text layers from the Display Layers list see 3 35 for how to select more than one layer If you decide you don t want to apply the changes you have made click the Restore Defaults button to restore the settings selected in the Display Preferences dialog box The Restore Defaults button works at any time before closing the dialog box or after re entering it Display Layers Page Boundary Simulation Currents Simulation Voltages Stimulus Title Block User
23. File To reorganize a library file 1 Expand the library 2 Edit the 1st file with a text editor to add delete or rearrange files 3 Compress the library lst File Format Table 11 5 1ist File Format File Name Definition Name XXXX SYM XXXX Example 7400 sym 7400 Reorganizing a Library File C 5 C 6 Library Expansion and Compression Utility Running LXCWin Using Command Line Options You can also run LXCWin using command line options The options are f X C n lt libnames gt Example LXCWin flb Fix Index default Expand Compress Do not delete definition files One or more library names the names may include wildcards Advanced Netlisting Configuration Items Overview This appendix contains information regarding advanced netlisting configuration In this chapter you will find the following sections Specifying PSpice Node Name Netlisting Preferences on page D 2 Specifying Board Layout Node Name Netlisting Preferences on page D 3 Customizing EDIF Netlists on page D 4 D 2 Advanced Netlisting Configuration Items Specifying PSpice Node Name Netlisting Preferences By default the PSpice netlister assigns names such as N_001 to nodes that are not explicitly labeled You can change the format that the netlister uses to create these names by using a text editor and editing the msim ini file in the Windows directory Add a line to the SCHEMATICS
24. Flipping a Part M1 VNO0120N2 Default M1 E VNO120N2 T Flipped once 4 12 Creating and Editing Designs Note You can quickly change the value of a displayed attribute such as a resistor value by double clicking it Note f you double click when selecting the attribute the pointer is placed on the current value in the Value text box Save Attr Editing Part Attributes Parts ports wires nets buses and most other symbols have associated attributes An attribute consists of a name and an associated value See Attributes on page 3 4 You can create new attributes or edit existing attributes of a part on the schematic These functions are performed in the Attribute Editing dialog box Editing Attributes Editing an attribute 1 Double click the part to display the Attribute Editing dialog box R1_ PartName R Name Value TEMPLATE R REFDES 1 2 7TOLERANCEIR REFL A REFDES R1 Change Display m PART R TOLERANCE PKGTYPE RCO5 ATE z IV Include Non changeable Attributes OK IV Include System defined Attributes E 2 Inthe list of attributes and values select the attribute to be edited The attribute name appears in the Name text box and the current value in the Value text box 3 Edit the value in the Value text box 4 Click Save Attr 5 Click OK An attribute with an asterisk next to it indicates that the attribute canno
25. Snap to Grid Stay on Grid must be enabled Snap to grid controls the movement of the object while being for Snap to Grid to be effective moved for placement when Stay on Grid is enabled If Snap to Grid and Stay on Grid are both enabled movement during object placement is in increments equal to the current grid spacing If Snap to Grid is not selected the object moves smoothly Enabling snap to grid From the Options menu select Display Options Display Options ix r Options g k vi vta 2 Inthe Options frame select or clear the Snap to Grid check I Snapto Grid I Orthogonal box to enable or disable snap to grid M Snapto Pin I Cursor and Y A eieren 3 Click OK r Grid Spacing Grid Size 0010 in Text Grid Snap to Pin K M Snap to pin when enabled causes the end point of a wire or bus Grid Size i PE de ice segment to snap to the nearest pin if one is found inside the meee radius defined by the Gravity setting Gravity 00 01 in Cance Enabling snap to pin 1 From the Options menu select Display Options 2 Inthe Options frame select or clear the Snap to Pin check box to enable or disable snap to pin 3 Click OK Gravity Gravity specifies how close an object must be to a pin to snap to 1t Gravity is only functional when snap to pin is enabled Using Wires and Buses 4 35 Specifying gravity 1 From the Options menu select Display Options shown on page 4 34
26. it is rotated about this point A physical device consisting of one or more gates The use of a mathematical model to represent the physical operation of a circuit design An attribute specifying the type of physical package that the actual circuit board will use For example DIP14 chip carrier surface mount An attribute specifying grouping of similar package types For example DIP would be the class for all sizes of dip package types DIP14 for example One sheet of a multiple sheet schematic A page may contain both parts represented by symbols port instances connectors and annotation symbols A page may or may not have a title Each schematic page represents a single page of a circuit design An electrical component that is represented by a schematic symbol A part refers to the logical rather than the physical component Describes the symbol in terms of its symbol type such as 2 input NAND Refers to an occurrence of a symbol in a schematic Consists of the symbol for a part graphics and pins minus any text Contained in parts ports and off page connectors Parts can contain multiple pins Each part contains specific pin names associated with the part Pins may connect to a wire a bus or another pin Provides the pin number the location of each pin relative to the symbol origin and the electrical attributes of the pin pin name pin number pin to pin spacing port primitive symbol reference desig
27. placed on the schematic An initial guess is made during translation based on the first letter of the reference designator The PSpice Simulation Device Types dialog box displays the list of parts and the translator s initial assignment of device type Use this dialog to review the list and make any necessary corrections Part field data conversion is determined by the devmap ini mapping file For each PSpice device type the map file lists the OrCAD SDT part field corresponding to the simulation device parameters for that device type Devmap ini is a text file that you may need to modify depending on how you used OrCAD SDT part fields Importing OrCAD Files A 7 Other options in the PSpice simulation device types dialog box e Part RefDes lists each part s symbol name and reference designator on the schematic e Device lists the PSpice device types to be assigned to the corresponding parts e Available Device lists all of the available PSpice simulation device types e Set Device Type assigns the device type in the Available Device text box to the selected parts Translating Multi Page Schematics To translate a multi page schematic translate the root page the page containing the ILINK text that lists the files of the other pages All pages referenced by the ILINK text are translated Schematics keeps all pages of a multi page schematic in a single file therefore there will only be one resulting schematic file the
28. roma g Pin Attributes Pin 1 Orient horizontal ERC don t care Y The Float and Modeled Pin Ia eee boxes in the Change Pin dialog EN eo E are only relevant for symbols that 2 7 Modeled Pin are going to be simulated with I Hidden ef Cancel PSpice For additional information refer to your PSpice user s guide In the Type list box select a pin type Click OK The change is only in effect for the selected pin Defining and Editing Pin Types 6 25 Changing the pin name To create pin names with overbars use the character To change the name of a pin do the following for example CLK 1 Double click the pin or pin name Use the Pin List selection from the Part menu to view and edit 2 Inthe Change Pin dialog box type the pin name in the Pin the list of all pins for the symbol Name text box 3 Click OK Note Pin names MUST be unique UN As you placed pins default names were assigned Changing the pin number As you placed pins default pin numbers were assigned To change the pin number for a pin do the following 1 Double click the pin or pin number of the displayed pin to display the Change Pin dialog box In the Pin text box type the pin number 3 Click OK Displaying the pin name By default pins you place on symbols will have their pin names displayed To disable pin names do the following 1 Double click the pin or pin name to display the Change Pin dialo
29. s Guide Using an Existing XNF File ina Schematic You can create a block in your schematic that references an XNF Schematics supports XNF file This is useful if you need to simulate your design with versions 5 0 through 6 1 Xilinx FPGAs that were designed or synthesized by other tools When you create an XNF block Schematics automatically adds pins to the block corresponding to the I O pads in the XNF file When you simulate the design a simulation model for the FPGA will be created automatically Note The simulation model will contain timing information if the block s XNF file contained timing information Refer to the MicroSim FPGA User s Guide Running XACTstep After you have entered the circuit design for an FPGA you can start XACTstep from Schematics by selecting Run XACTstep from the Tools menu 10 6 Targeting Your Design for Programmable Logic XACTstep uses XNF netlist files for a schematic When you select Run XAct for the first time the XNF files are created for the schematic Note This command only appears if you have DesignLab installed Refer to the MicroSim FPGA User s Guide Running Simulations To simulate FPGA designs you must set up your design Select FPGA Settings from the Tools menu You have the option of doing either a functional or a timing simulation Note This command only appears if you have DesignLab installed Preparing Your Design for Board Layout 11 Overview This
30. 1 opening 3 7 saving 3 7 fileset definition of Glossary 2 filling shapes 6 15 Find dialog box 4 42 finding most recently placed part 4 5 part 4 4 4 42 fitting view to page 3 44 flat schematic definition of Glossary 2 flipping area of drawing 6 18 area of schematic 4 11 elements of a symbol 6 17 part 4 10 Font dialog box 3 36 fonts Index 7 changing 3 36 footprints for a component 5 4 footprints See package types FPGA creating a block in a mixed design 10 4 entering an FPGA only design 10 4 running simulations 10 6 running XACTstep 10 5 targeting Xilinx 10 4 function keys 3 14 5 11 G gate definition of Glossary 2 Get New Part button 4 6 5 9 Get Package Definition dialog box 6 37 Get Recent Part list 4 5 Global Edit Attributes dialog box 4 17 global editing definition of Glossary 2 global editing of attributes 4 17 global library 1 7 global port 4 39 definition of Glossary 2 labeling 4 39 placing 4 38 7 9 symbol 4 26 4 38 using 4 38 graphical representation 4 4 graphics properties changing 4 55 4 56 filling shapes 6 15 Graphics Properties dialog box 6 15 gravity definition of Glossary 3 settings 3 29 specifying 3 31 4 35 5 17 with snap to pin enabled 4 35 gravity radius definition of Glossary 3 grid definition of Glossary 3 display options 3 29 enabling or disabling display 5 16 settings 3 29 spacing 3 31 4 35 5 17 stay on 3 30 5 16 Index
31. 2000 Title Block Symbol Jittebk Autosave interval 1710 min I Monochrome Mode Cancel 2 Click Library Settings to display the Library Settings dialog box Library Name ANALOG M Symbol File Extension slb IV Package File Extension plb Add Local Change Delete Browse z DK Cancel 745 slb plb ABM slb ADV LIN slb plb ANLG2 sib plb ANLG_DEV slb plb use in all schematics In the list of libraries select the location for the new library A new global library will be added directly above the library you select A new local library will be placed above the first global library name in the list If the library you are adding is a symbol library select the Symbol check box If the library you are adding has an associated package library select the Package check box In the Library Name text box type the name of the library Do not type a file name extension if the library you are using is listed in the dialog box the file name extension is appended automatically Click Add for a global library or click Add Local for a local library If you are adding a global library Schematics writes the library name to the msim ini file so it is available to all schematic designs Click OK to exit the Library Settings dialog box In the Editor Configuration dialog box click OK Configuring Schematics 3 19 If the library yo
32. 3 workspaces 2 1 X XACTstep running in FPGA 10 5 Xilinx targeting Xilinx FPGAs 10 4 Z zoned border style 3 27 Zoom Area button 3 8 3 42 5 8 zoom factor 4 66 Zoom In button 3 8 3 42 5 8 Zoom Out button 3 8 3 42 5 8 zoom parameters setting 3 43 Zoom to Fit Page button 3 8 3 44 5 8
33. 4 Draw Circle button 3 12 5 Draw Polyline button 3 12 Draw Text Box button 3 12 Draw Text button 3 12 4 5 Draw Wire button 3 9 Draw Wire button 1 11 4 23 7 23 Drawing toolbar 3 9 drawing additional pages 4 60 arc 6 10 area 3 28 block 3 9 box 6 11 bus 1 12 3 9 4 30 4 31 circle 6 11 connections 4 31 custom power and ground symbols 4 27 line 6 11 lower level schematic 7 24 options 4 33 orthogonal wires and buses 4 33 symbol graphics 6 10 text 3 12 4 51 6 12 text box 3 12 4 50 top level schematic 7 20 wire 1 11 3 9 4 28 DSL blocks creating and editing 10 2 DXF files exporting B 1 9 9 6 12 E ECO 11 29 applying backward 11 22 applying forward 11 23 definition of Glossary 2 file formats 11 24 EDIF 200 11 24 edit attributes 5 14 Edit Attributes button 3 9 4 17 5 9 6 44 7 7 Edit Attributes dialog box 4 59 11 18 Edit Gate Types dialog box 6 41 Edit Package Definition dialog box 6 35 Edit Package Types dialog box 6 38 Edit Reference Designator dialog box 1 14 7 5 11 7 Edit Reference dialog box 7 22 Edit Symbol button 3 9 4 18 5 5 editing annotation items 4 50 annotation text 4 52 attribute 4 12 4 17 bounding box 6 29 bus label 4 31 design 1 2 DSL blocks 10 2 existing symbols 6 20 global 4 17 hidden power and ground pins 6 27 hierarchical block 7 4 hierarchical design 1 2 hierarchical symbols 7 9
34. 4 orthogonal connectivity 4 33 drawing wires and buses 4 33 enabling 4 34 with rubberbanding enabled 4 36 Outline border style 3 27 P package definition of Glossary 4 information 6 34 library 4 4 package class priorities 11 10 package definition active symbol 6 37 contents 11 6 copying 6 36 creating 6 35 A 5 creating new 6 35 deleting 6 45 editing 6 35 how used 11 6 name E 2 open package library 6 37 where stored 4 4 Package Definition dialog box 6 35 Package dialog box 11 8 package library definition of Glossary 4 package type class definition of Glossary 4 package types adding 6 46 assigning A 5 configuring 6 46 definition of Glossary 4 editing 6 37 list of 6 34 multiple 6 39 per pin assignment 6 38 symbol 5 4 Package Types dialog box A 5 packager 11 6 packaging 6 35 automatically 11 8 information 5 3 parts in design 11 6 reference designators 11 9 PADS layout 11 24 page border 3 4 changing settings 3 24 changing size 3 23 connecting 4 61 copying 4 61 creating new 4 60 definition of Glossary 4 deleting 4 63 title 4 46 title changing 4 46 viewing 4 62 viewing multiple 4 62 Page Info dialog box 4 46 Page Settings dialog box 3 28 Page Size dialog box 3 23 Pan amp Zoom dialog box 3 43 3 45 panning automatic 3 45 new center 3 44 part auto repeat 4 19 copying 4 18 definition of Glossary 4 finding 4 4 4 42 flipping 4 10
35. 4 32 layout netlist creating 11 25 file formats 11 24 mapping files 11 25 libraries searching for parts 4 6 library browser 4 8 configuring 3 16 custom 4 18 list of F 1 model 4 4 name 6 49 package 4 4 path 6 49 removing 3 20 simulation model 8 5 symbol 3 16 4 4 6 5 F 1 Library Browser dialog box 1 8 4 8 4 39 library expansion and compression utility C 1 Library Settings dialog box 3 18 6 48 line drawing 6 11 loading symbol libraries 6 20 locating new library 3 19 pointer on schematic 1 9 3 13 source of message 3 48 main functions of MicroSim Schematics 1 2 main window 3 6 managing files 2 1 mapping files 11 25 marker attaching 11 3 definition of Glossary 3 using 8 9 Marker Color button 3 10 menus 3 6 5 7 message definition of Glossary 3 Message Viewer 3 48 additional information 3 49 closing 3 49 severity indicator 3 48 using 3 47 metafiles importing 4 57 6 13 mirroring See flipping model behavioral 7 13 definition 4 4 library 4 4 name E 2 simulation 8 4 F 2 model definition definition of Glossary 3 More Info button 3 49 mouse conventions IV moving down in hierarchy 7 15 interface port symbols 7 6 Index 9 non electrical information 4 59 object on schematic 4 41 parts 1 15 symbol element 6 19 text 1 15 to top of hierarchy 7 15 up in hierarchy 7 15 wires 1 15 msim ini file configuring 3 39 definition o
36. Before You Begin For UNIX users All screen captures in this manual are of Windows dialog boxes and windows Most options in these dialog boxes and windows are available in your operating environment When certain options are not available to you or you must do something differently than what is primarily outlined information specific to your platform is provided How to Use this Guide This guide is designed so you can quickly find the information you need to use Schematics This guide assumes that you are familiar with Microsoft Windows NT or 95 including how to use icons menus and dialog boxes It also assumes you have a basic understanding about how Windows manages applications and files to perform routine tasks such as starting programs and opening and saving your work If you are new to Windows please review your Microsoft Windows User s Guide Typographical Conventions Before using Schematics it is important to understand the terms and typographical conventions used in this documentation This guide generally follows the conventions used in the Microsoft Windows User s Guide Procedures for performing an operation are generally numbered with the following typographical conventions Notation Examples Description Ctr R Press CtrI R A specific key or key stroke on the keyboard monospace Type VAC or Commands text entered from font analog slb the keyboard or file names Related D
37. Differences between OrCAD SDT and Schematics A 11 Unsupported by Schematics The OrCAD SDT feature pins with a pin number of zero are not drawn Therefore some symbols are drawn with unexpected pins or with missing pins Only the first representation of the symbol GATE A is translated Text with a vertical orientation is translated into rotated text Dashed annotation lines are not included in the translated schematic De Morgan equivalents convert symbols You get the non converted version on your schematic Fill patterns used in parts are not translated Stimulus Trace and Layout symbols on the OrCAD SDT schematic are not translated Exporting DXF Files Overview This appendix provides information regarding exporting DXF files In this chapter you will find the following sections Exporting DXF Files on page B 2 Exporting from the Schematic Editor on page B 3 Exporting in the Symbol Editor on page B 4 B 2 Exporting DXF Files Exporting DXF Files The Export function generates Drawing Interchange Format DXF files These files are also known as AutoCAD Format 2 D files You can export the entire schematic drawing a page a portion of a page or symbol graphics to a DXF file Exporting from the Schematic Editor Exporting from the Schematic Editor 1 From the File menu select Export to display the Export dialog box Schematics Export Lx Pages Select All Cancel 2
38. Enter VSRC in the Part text box Click Place amp Close Move the symbol to the desired location and click to place it a A W N Right click to stop placing parts Drawing the two analog ground symbols 1 Click the Get New Part button to display the Part Browser dialog box see 7 21 Enter AGND in the Part text box Click OK Move the symbol to the desired location and click to place it Repeat for the second ground symbol 5 Right click to stop placing parts Drawing the wires Click the Draw Wire button and draw wires to connect parts and symbols as shown in Figure 7 2 Example Creating a Hierarchical Design 7 27 Saving the file Click the Save File button to save the schematic You are not prompted for a file name because the schematic was named when you pushed into it from the top level schematic Preparing Your Design for Simulation Overview This chapter provides guidelines for preparing your schematic for simulation and references further information contained in your PSpice user s guide A design that is targeted for simulation will have e parts that there are simulation models available and configured for Refer to Linking a Symbol to a Model or Subcircuit Definition in your PSpice user s guide e sources of stimulus to the circuit Refer to Minimum circuit design requirements tables in the list of tables in your PSpice user s guide In this chapter you will find the following sectio
39. OrCAD File A 2 B 3 Library Browser 1 8 4 8 4 39 Library Settings 3 18 6 48 Package 11 8 Package Definition 6 35 Package Types A 5 Page Info 4 46 Page Settings 3 28 Page Size 3 23 Pan amp Zoom 3 43 3 45 Part Browser 1 8 1 9 1 16 4 6 7 21 Pin Type 6 24 Place Text 6 12 Print 4 64 5 21 Remove Package Definition 6 45 Replace Part 4 24 Report Setup 11 14 Reports 11 13 Schematics Export B 3 Select Page 4 62 Set Attribute Value 1 11 4 29 7 18 Set Up Block 7 24 Set Up Block dialog box 7 5 Setup Package Class Priorities 11 10 Shared Pin Assignments 6 42 Symbol Wizard 6 4 Symbols Export B 4 Toolbars 3 7 Translators 7 14 Where 7 16 digital stimulus source 8 7 disabling auto repeat 4 20 grid display 5 16 snap to pin 3 31 4 34 5 17 stay on grid 3 30 5 16 toolbar display 3 7 5 8 display map definition of Glossary 2 display options gravity 4 35 grid on 3 29 5 16 grid spacing 4 35 rubberbanding 4 35 text grid 5 19 Display Options dialog box 3 30 3 31 4 34 5 8 5 16 display preferences 3 34 3 36 3 37 changing graphics properties 4 56 changing text properties 4 53 Display Preferences dialog box 3 36 displaying pin names 6 25 pin numbers 6 25 toolbars 3 7 distinction between connectors and ports 11 3 dockable toolbars 3 7 Draw Arc button 3 12 5 8 6 10 Draw Block button 3 9 7 4 Index 6 Draw Box button 3 12 5 8 6 Draw Bus button 1 12 3 9
40. PLD Bipolar transistors Parameterized devices for model purposes Brooktree Corporation DAC delay lines comparators Burr Brown Corporation operational amplifiers CD4000 digital devices Chips and Technologies Inc CPU counters shift registers PLL buffers modulators gates adders switches multipliers display drivers timers flip flops latches Comlinear Corporation operational amplifiers F 4 Symbol Libraries Table F 1 Symbol Libraries continued Symbol Library File Contents Name connect slb Connectors dallas slb dataconv slb dig_ecl slb dig_gal slb dig_misc slb dig_pal slb dig_prim slb diode slb ebipolar slb ecl slb ediode slb elantec slb epwrbjt slb exel slb filtsub slb fujitsu slb fwbell slb goldstar slb Dallas Semiconductor delay lines SRAM transceivers timers FIFO microcontrollers ADC DAC Emitter coupled logic devices Generic array logic devices Miscellaneous digital devices Programmable array logic devices Digital primitives for use with PLSyn as well as general simulation purposes Diodes Zener diodes current regulator diodes varactors European bipolar transistors Motorola Corp National Semiconductor Inc DRAM gates multiplexers level translators prescalers error correction detection European diodes and rectifiers Elantec Inc operational amplifiers transistor arrays European power bipolar transistors Exel Micr
41. Pin Types 6 23 Defining and Editing Pin Types Pins establish the input and output terminals for symbols For a pin you can e select the type of graphic to display e specify a pin name e specify a pin number e choose to display the name the number or both Specifying Pin Types Figure 6 1 shows the twelve types of pins that you can place using Schematics x Normal gt ANSI Inverted Clock Bubble x Zero Length Clock Normal Long gt Bubble Clock Bubble Long ANSI Inverted Out gt Clock Long ANSI Inverted In gt Bubble Clock Long Figure 6 1 Pin Types 6 24 Creating and Editing Symbols Selecting a default pin type a Noma Note To specify the default pin type do not select a Bubble igi C Clock _Lancel_ specific pin when performing the following ES cia procedure If a pin is selected the pin type will only C ANSI scale apply to that pin ANSI Inverted Clock C Zero Length 1 From the Edit menu select Pin Type to display the Pin Type 2 Sul ea dialog box You can also double click the pin to display the Clock long Change Pin dialog box Bubble Clock long 2 Click the appropriate option to select the pin type Shortcut press Ctrl T 3 Click OK Changing the type of a placed pin 1 Select the pin and from the Edit menu select Change Pin Name Edit Attributes M Display Name Tg
42. Save File button 2 Type tlcmos as the name of the file the sch extension is assigned by default 3 Click OK Drawing the Lower Level Schematic The top level design is complete Now you can create the inner schematic of the CMOS inverter To do so select the block and use the Push selection from the Navigate menu to push to a lower level Because you haven t defined the lower level yet you are presented with a Setup Block dialog box to name the new schematic M2N6804 M10 VSRC lt IN gt s lt o M3 K M2N6802 WO vo Figure 7 2 Schematic of CMOS Inverter Example Creating a Hierarchical Design 7 25 Selecting the block and naming the new schematic 1 Click the CMOSINV block to select it 2 From the Navigate menu select Push Because the block is new the Setup Block dialog box appears Set Up Block Filename Jexample sch Browse Type Schematic Z Implementation gt M Implemented as Programmable Logic He Target XILINX oK OK Family XC5200 Cancel Enter the new schematic name cmos Click OK Move the interface port symbols in the same way you move other symbols a Click to select it b Drag it to the desired location c Release to complete the move Now draw the schematic for the CMOSINV block as shown in Figure 7 2 Drawing the two MOSFET devices 1 Click the Get New Part button to display the Part B
43. Specifying Part Packaging Information 6 37 Editing a Package Definition You can edit a package definition for the active symbol or for any package definition in the open package library Editing the package definition for the active symbol 1 From the Package menu select Edit to display the Package definition dialog box The options within the dialog box are discussed in the following sections 2 When you are finished with the dialog box click OK Editing a package definition in the open package library Packaging Menu E view Options Window He 1 From the Packaging menu select Get to display the Get Package Definition dialog box New Copy 2 Type the name of the package in the Pkg Name text box or click a name from the list 3 Click Edit to display the Package Definition dialog box with the values for the requested package listed Pkg Name The options within the dialog box are discussed in the following sections 4 When you are finished with the Package Definition dialog box click OK zi Cancel Editing Package Types When you are editing a package definition you can specify the package types in which a component is available The package type name defines the footprint name to be used in layout 6 38 Creating and Editing Symbols Shortcut press Ctrl E Edit Package Types Note The Configured Package Types List is a list of commonly used package types it is not
44. Symbols chapter of your PSpice user s guide 8 4 Preparing Your Design for Simulation Handling Unmodeled Pins Parts that have some pins that are not modeled will appear broken when placed on the schematic To see an example of this place an instance of the PM 741 part from the opamp slb symbol library The 0S1 and OS 2 pins are not modeled so only the V V and OUT pins are netlisted for simulation For the simulator these pins appear as a large resistor connected to the ground Double click the part to display the Attribute Editing dialog box Note that the TEMPLATE attribute for the part only calls out the V V and OUT pins The 0S 1 and OS2 pins are not called out in the TEMP LATE because those two pins are not modeled in the simulation model for the PM 741 part You can view the simulation model definition for the PM 741 part from Schematics Viewing a simulation model for a part Click the part to select it From the Edit menu select Model Click Edit Instance Model Text to display the Schematics Model Editor and view an instance of the simulation model definition 4 Click Cancel to exit the Model Editor without saving Specifying Simulation Model Libraries 8 5 Specifying Simulation Model Libraries Refer to the Creating Models chapter of your PSpice user s guide for information about creating and configuring simulation model libraries Each part that you intend to simulate must
45. Text Characteristics 5 15 3 Click to select an item in the list Change any of the characteristics of the text in the Display Characteristics frame of the dialog box as shown in Table 5 3 Click OK In the Change Pin dialog box click OK Free Standing Text You can change the text characteristics of any of the free standing text that you have placed on the symbol The changes you make are only applied to the text item you are currently editing Changing free standing text characteristics 1 Double click the text to display the Change Text dialog box Text This Object Orient horizontal Q DK Hiust iett ta i Cancel Viust normal bd Size roo Change the orientation justification or size as shown in Table 5 3 on 5 13 2 Click OK 5 16 Using the Symbol Editor Changing Grid and Gravity The grid and gravity functions of Schematics eases your drawing tasks and can help make your schematic more precise Grid On When Grid On is enabled the grid is displayed in the drawing area of the schematic editor window Enabling or disabling the grid display 1 Select Display Options from the Options menu to display the Display Options dialog box E Options j M Snap to Grid Cursor and Y M Stay on Grid 2 Select or clear the Grid On check box to enable or disable the grid display Grid Spacing 00 10 in Gravity foo 03 in M Text Stay On Grid Spacing 00 02 in Cancel
46. Title sge 4 2 5 duros a OS e ED OS 4 46 Entering Information into the Title Block 4 47 Creating a Custom Title Block 2 2 ee 4 48 Using a Custom Title Block Symbol 4 49 Adding Non Electrical Information o o 4 50 WOXE atrio iscdorr A 400 A 4 50 Multiple Line Text Editing e osos wa e e HR eS 4 50 Single Line Text Eding is e sosa se os es ee wk t 4 51 Changing the Properties of the Text o 4 52 GTaphiCS sig us da BS 4 hers os Bade aon a 4 54 Contents vii Adding Graphics ss seasea na e A 4 54 Changing Graphics Properties o oo 4 55 Importing Bitmaps and Metafiles 4 57 Amnotation Symbols o aea a eee ee ee 4 58 Moving Non Electrical Information aoaaa a 4 59 Creating and Editing Multi sheet Designs ooa aaa o 4 60 Adding a Page toa Design sow i moesson ees Be e Se A 4 60 Creating Connections Between Pages oouo aaa 4 61 Viewing Multiple Pages esos sack sede eae pore RR SS 4 62 Cutting Copying and Pasting Between Pages 4 62 Deleting Pare ei Gi SB e aoe a a Eee dea e 4 63 Printing Your Design 2 244 i6004 64563 ereda Ree aya 4 64 SCANS 6 5 426 de AA OS wee OE OH Bee awe 4 65 Aut esga eey uee e Ee OE eH OES OG oe 4 65 User Definable Zoom Factor aooaa 4 66 Closing the Schematic Editor 22 0404 284684 5488 54 c4e a4 d 4 70 Chapter 5 Using the Symbol Editor OVEIVI
47. Vertical Offset to 00 20 b Select the Enable Auto Repeat check box c Click OK From the Get Recent Part list box on the toolbar select R Place the pointer in the approximate position for the placement of R3 and click to place the part a Place amp Close AA y AN ANA As you place parts the numerical portion of the reference designator is automatically assigned For instance if you place resistor R2 the next resistor you place will be designated R3 1 10 Getting Started Table 1 1 Remaining Parts to be Placed Reference Part Designator Name Cl C Ul A4N25 U2 A4N25 U3 74164 U4 74164 US 74174 U6 74174 U7 7485 USA 74123 U9A 74123 4 Press three times to place three more resistors above the first Placing resistors R7 through R10 1 From the Get Recent Part list box on the toolbar select R 2 Press CtrI R to rotate the resistor before placing it 3 Place four resistors in the approximate locations of R7 R8 R9 and R10 4 Right click to stop placing resistors Placing the remaining parts on the schematic Click the Get New Part button 2 In the Part Browser dialog box select each part listed in Table 1 1 from the Part list box 3 Place the part on the schematic in the approximate location shown in Figure 1 2 Example Drawing a Schematic 1 11 Drawing and Labeling Wires Draw the wire labeled datac1k to connect pin 8 CLK on U3 and pin 1 A on USA Drawing the d
48. a design you can zoom in enlarge the view or zoom out reduce the view to view a larger or smaller portion of the schematic window Zooming in reduces the area viewed and enlarges the objects viewed Zooming out increases the area viewed and reduces the size of the objects viewed Zooming in 1 From the View menu select In 2 Move the pointer to the desired center of the zoom action and click Zooming in about the center of the window 1 Click the Zoom In button The amount of magnification is determined by the Zoom Scale Factor see Setting Zoom Parameters on page 3 43 Zooming in on a selected area of the page 1 Click the Zoom Area button or select Area from the View menu 2 Drag a selection rectangle to select the desired display area Zooming out 1 From the View menu select Out 2 Move the pointer to the desired center of the zoom action and click Zooming out about the center of the window 1 Click the Zoom Out button Zooming and Panning in Schematics 3 43 The amount of reduction is determined by the Zoom Scale Factor see Setting Zoom Parameters on page 3 43 Zooming out to view the full schematic page 1 From the View menu select Entire Page Setting Zoom Parameters Setting scale factor and fit The Zoom parameters tailor how the work space will be magnified or reduced when you make selections from the View menu or click any of the zoom buttons 1 2 From the Options menu select Pan amp Zoom
49. an annotation symbol and each text field is an attribute As such you can edit the attributes of the title block much the same as you would the attributes of other objects You can type information into the title block in the default format or you can create a custom title block Editing Page Title The page title when specified appears in the title block Changing the page title 1 From the Navigate menu select Edit Page Info to display the Page Info dialog box 2 Type a page title in the Page Title text box The Simulation Only check box when enabled displays a check mark indicates the entire page is to be ignored for purposes other than simulation for instance it will be ignored for PCB layout 3 Click OK Creating and Editing Title Blocks 4 47 Entering Information into the Title Block Entering information into the existing title block can be done in one of two ways 1 by editing the attributes of the title block in which case you can type information into any or all fields of the title block or 2 by editing an individual attribute of the title block WicroSin Corporation Page Site 20 Fairbanks Irvine GA 92718 T1477 ee Example Schematic Revision 1 001 1a January 31 2009 Page 1 of 4 Entering information into multiple attributes of the title block 1 a A W N Select the title block then select Attributes from the Edit menu to display the Attribute Editing dialog box PartName
50. an FPGA only device For more information on how to set up Schematics using FPGA devices refer to the MicroSim FPGA User s Guide Entering an FPGA only Design An FPGA only design is a design that represents only the FPGA circuitry The interface ports at the top level define the inputs and outputs of the FPGA To define an FPGA only design select FPGA Settings from the Tools menu Refer to the MicroSim FPGA User s Guide Entering an FPGA Block ina Mixed Design A mixed design is a design that can consist of one or more FPGA blocks plus additional circuitry Each FPGA is represented by a schematic block and any additional circuitry is connected to pins of the block The inputs and outputs of the block represent the inputs and outputs of the FPGA The schematic represented by the block must be designated as representing an FPGA It can contain only Xilinx Universal Library symbols or other hierarchical blocks that use Xilinx symbols Targeting Xilinx FPGAs 10 5 When you push into a block for the first time you designate that Refer to the MicroSim FPGA the schematic it represents is for the implementation of an User s Guide FPGA Incorporating an Existing Xilinx Schematic into a Design There are two ways to incorporate an existing Xilinx schematic into another design You can set up the schematic in a block or you can convert the schematic into a symbol and then place the symbol Refer to the MicroSim FPGA User
51. and Y M Stay on Grid rM Grid Spacing Grid Size 0010 in m Text Grid M Stay on Grid Grid Size 00 02 in r Snap to Pin Gravity 00 01 in Cancel Note The Stay on Grid command must be enabled for the Snap to Grid command to be effective Stay on Grid Stay on grid controls the method of object placement When Stay on Grid is enabled the objects are forced onto grid when placed We recommend that you enable this so that electrical connections are made correctly Enabling or disabling stay on grid 1 From the Options menu select Display Options 2 Select or clear the Stay on Grid check box to enable or disable Stay on Grid 3 Click OK Snap to Grid Snap to grid controls the movement of the object while being moved for placement when Stay on Grid is enabled If Snap to Grid and Stay on Grid are both enabled movement during object placement is in increments equal to the current grid spacing If Snap to Grid is not selected the object moves smoothly Enabling or disabling snap to grid 1 From the Options menu select Display Options 2 Select or clear the Snap to Grid check box to enable or disable snap to grid 3 Click OK Snap to Pin Snap to pin when enabled causes the endpoint of a wire or bus segment to snap to the nearest pin if one is found inside the radius defined by the Gravity setting Enabling or disabling snap to pin From the Options menu select Display Options 2
52. box 2 Edit the existing label or delete it and type in a new label Connecting wires to buses 1 Draw a wire so that it ends on the bus DB o 16 2 Label the wire with one of the signals on the bus For ual example you can label the wire DB 12 or DB12 if the bus is labeled DB 0 16 Splitting buses Connecting a bus segment to the middle of another bus segment creates a junction The bus segments become part of the same bus unless labeled differently This allows sub buses to be taken off a main bus for example A 0 7 from A 0 31 DE 0 16 1 Draw a bus segment and end it on the main bus DBjo 3a 2 Label the bus segment with a subset of the signals on the main bus 4 32 Creating and Editing Designs For example you can label the bus segment DB 0 8 if the main bus is labeled DB 0 16 Automatically Labeling Wires and Buses Use the Auto Naming function to set up the labeling of wires and ports The syntax specified in the Label Template text box allows you to name a uniform collection of wires Naming a collection of wires connected to a bus 1 From the Options menu select Auto Naming to display the Reference Designators gt Auto Naming dialog box V Enable Auto Naming Starting Designator No fI 2 Inthe Wire Port Labels frame select the Enable Auto PONER Increment check box pn pan 3 Inthe Label Template text box type the label for the first iene ci al wire in the series for example CLK 0 Wires will be
53. circuits simulate circuits using MicroSim PSpice analyze simulation results using MicroSim Probe graphically characterize simulation stimuli using the fully integrated Stimulus Editor so stimulus definitions are automatically associated with the appropriate symbols graphically characterize simulation models using the fully integrated MicroSim Parts utility so model definitions are automatically associated with the appropriate symbols interface to MicroSim PSpice Optimizer for analog circuit performance optimization interface to MicroSim PLSyn and MicroSim FPGA for programmable logic synthesis interface to MicroSim PCBoards for printed circuit board layout The MicroSim family of products is fully integrated giving you the flexibility to work through your circuit design in a consistent environment The following illustration demonstrates how the MicroSim family of products work together with Schematics as the central point of control MicroSim Schematics Overview _ iii MicroSim MicroSim packages symbols Schematics PCBoards footprints packages a padstacks P J lt J Y MicroSim MicroSim PSpice PLSyn Optimizer om Z gt SPECCTRA wa PLD Autorouter device databas models TOOSE VE S MicroSim e MERECES im gt SNe reports Sam drill files Probe Gerber files K iv
54. copies it to the clipboard Copy copies a selected objectto 4 43 the clipboard Paste pastes the most recently cut 4 43 or copied object from the clipboard Undo undoes the previous action 4 44 Main Window 3 7 To dock toolbars 1 Click anywhere on the toolbar except on the buttons 2 Drag it to the desired location in the schematic window or on your desktop The next time you open Schematics the toolbars will be where you last placed them Toolbars Toolbars Standard Schematics Drawing i Simulation W Annotation Graphics To display toolbars 1 From the View menu select Toolbars 2 Select or clear the check box for each toolbar to enable or disable its display 3 Click Close and the selected toolbars will display 3 8 Using the Schematic Editor Table 3 1 Standard Schematics Toolbar BEBA ME Name Redo Redraw Zoom In Zoom Out Zoom Area Zoom to Fit Page Function redoes what was just undone refreshes the active schematic page screen display views a smaller area of schematic views a larger area of schematic views a Selected area of schematic fits the view to show all items on the page Page 4 44 Drawing Main Window 3 9 The Drawing toolbar provides shortcuts for drawing and editing items on your schematic ksi 100101 aj Table 3 2 Drawing Toolbar Button Name Function Page R Draw Wire enables drawing of
55. files simultaneously perform file management functions within Design Manger rather than Windows Explorer Design Manager Functions 2 5 Design Manager Functions The following describes Design Manager functions and activities General characteristics e automatic activation upon opening any MicroSim program e availability for use without other MicroSim programs running e automatic categorization of design related files sorted into file type categories within a workspace e ability to have multiple workspaces in their own windows open simultaneously e two methods view by Category and view by Name with which you can view and manage all files within a selected workspace as well as external references to files outside the selected workspace File management e copy move and delete all files or optionally a selected sub set from one workspace to another e optionally cut delete copy and archive all dependent files e cut delete copy and paste files as similarly done in Windows Explorer e drag and drop functionality e acceptance of files from Windows Explorer through commands or drag and drop e ability to create top level folders in Windows Explorer from Design Manager 2 6 Using Design Manager Archive and restore archive and restore to save a design and all of its references package files for shipment to another location save disk space and localize externally referenced and shared files into
56. for analysis See also View A Kind Of symbol Symbols must either contain graphics or refer to an AKO symbol The AKO defines the symbol in terms of the graphics and pins of another part Both must exist in the same symbol library file An exact electrical equivalent that can be used to reference a symbol A means by which parts are labeled when they are placed either automatically or manually A symbol with no electrical significance used to clarify point out or define items on the schematic Special characteristics a name and an associated value contained in a part instance or definition For example a MOSFET may contain specific length and width parameters that are represented as attributes on the symbol or part Attributes may be changed through the schematic editor the symbol editor or both Annotation of a schematic using an ECO file from the selected layout editor A user defined rectangle placed on a schematic It is used to represent or hold the place for a collection of circuitry The block is treated as a black box by Schematics Schematics is aware of the connections going into and out of the block but ignores the contents of the block until netlisting Glossary 2 bounding box bundle bus circuit connector current sensor design display map ECO ERC fileset flat schematic gate global editing global port A rectangular dotted line containing the graphics for a symbol and all
57. function is activated Any changes only apply to this instance of the hierarchical block or symbol Editing an instance of the schematic 1 From the Navigate menu select Push to push into the hierarchical block or symbol 2 From the Navigate menu select Edit Schematic Instance A check mark appears next to the menu item to show that it has been selected Note Any changes you make effect only this instance of the schematic To make changes to the schematic itself use the Edit Schematic Definition function Editing the schematic definition 1 From the Navigate menu select Push to push into the hierarchical block or symbol 2 From the Navigate menu select Edit Schematic Definition A check mark appears next to the menu item to show that it has been selected You can now edit the schematic Any changes that you make effect all instances of hierarchical blocks and symbols that reference this schematic Note Edit Schematic Instance and Edit Schematic Definition are mutually exclusive functions Shortcut press Navigate Menu MENTES View Options Analysis Select Page Create Page Delete Page Copy Page Edit Page Info Edit Schematic Instance v Edit Schematic Definition Shortcut press 7 18 Creating and Editing Hierarchical Designs Shortcut Press Ctrl S Passing Information Between Levels of Hierarchy With Schematics you can create a lower level schematic such that different i
58. graphical representation 3 3 hierarchical 3 3 instance 4 14 moving 1 15 4 41 packaging 6 34 placing 4 9 4 22 primitive 3 3 replacing 4 24 rotating 4 10 searching 4 41 selecting 4 5 4 40 4 41 part attributes specifying 8 3 part browser 4 6 advanced 4 6 basic 4 6 Part Browser dialog box 1 8 1 9 1 16 4 6 7 21 part description definition of Glossary 4 part instance changing display of attributes 4 15 definition of Glossary 4 part origin editing 6 28 part outline definition of Glossary 4 part value changing 1 14 parts placing and editing 4 9 stopping placement 4 9 passing information between levels of hierarchy 7 18 Index 11 pasting between pages 4 62 selected object 4 43 6 22 P CAD layout 11 24 PCBoards layout 11 24 pin adding to a symbol 6 12 assignments 6 38 broken 8 4 definition of Glossary 4 hidden 3 5 Glossary 3 name 5 14 6 40 number 5 14 shared power and ground 6 42 snap to 3 31 4 34 5 17 swapping 6 43 11 18 text characteristics 5 14 unmodeled 4 4 8 4 pin assignment list 6 34 Pin Assignments dialog box 6 40 pin definition definition of Glossary 4 pin names changing on the block 7 23 definition of Glossary 5 displaying 6 25 pin numbers assigning 6 42 changing 6 25 definition of Glossary 5 determining 11 6 displaying 6 25 editing 6 40 specifying physical 6 40 pin on hierarchical block deleting 7 7 Pin Swaps dialog
59. have a simulation model defined Checking if a part has a simulation model defined Double click the part on the schematic to display the Attribute Editing dialog box If a simulation model is available for a part the part will have e aTEMPLATE attribute specifying the PSpice simulation netlisting syntax for the part e aMODEL attribute specifying the name of the model or subcircuit The simulation model specified by the MODEL attribute must be contained in a model library that is configured Checking if a simulation model library is configured Select Library and Include Files from the Analysis menu to bring up the Library and Include Files dialog box The set of simulation model libraries configured are listed in the Library Files area For information on configuring simulation model libraries refer to Configuring the Library section in the Creating Models chapter in your PSpice user s guide 8 6 Preparing Your Design for Simulation Editing Simulation Models from Schematics You can define and edit simulation models directly from Schematics Models can be defined using the Parts utility or the text editor sometimes called the Model Editor The Parts utility is useful for characterizing specific models from data sheet curves The text editor is useful if model parameters are already defined for example models from a vendor or if the model is not supported by the Parts utility Refer to the Using the
60. have a transistor view or a gate view A special symbol used to display bias point voltages and currents during simulation Displays the bias point voltage at a pin Any pin on part or a port may have a viewpoint attached A graphical indication of a connection between pins buses and other wires Index A definition of Glossary 1 specifier 11 26 a kind of See AKO symbols 6 7 ABM Glossary 1 alias accessing symbols 6 20 definition of Glossary 1 Add Text dialog box 4 51 using 6 33 adding analog behavioral model See ABM annotation graphics 4 54 Analysis Setup button 3 10 annotation text 4 50 annotation attributes 4 14 back 4 13 11 29 Glossary 1 library 3 18 definition of Glossary 1 multiple line text 4 50 page border 3 4 non electrical information 4 50 symbols 3 4 4 58 package type 6 46 title block 3 4 package type for a component 6 38 annotation graphics page to design 4 60 adding 4 54 pins to a symbol 6 12 stimulus 8 7 symbol alias 6 33 text to schematic 4 51 text to symbol 6 12 wire segment 4 28 importing 4 57 6 13 resizing 4 55 Annotation Graphics toolbar 3 12 annotation symbols creating 4 58 definition of Glossary 1 Additional Info dialog box 3 49 non electrical information 4 58 advanced netlisting configuration items D 1 annotation text AKO adding 4 50 creating 6 9 App Settings dialog box 3 38 3 40 Index 2 arc drawing 6 10 archive 2 6 assigni
61. like the following X REFDES SIN IN OUT OUT MODEL Parameter Description X references a subcircuit definition REFDES appends the hierarchical path if there is one and the reference designator to the X in the netlist indicates that the item following will be a pin name MODEL indicates the value of the MODEL attribute will be placed here Click Save Attr Click OK Make any last changes and select Save from the File menu You can now call up the diode bridge symbol for use in a design Configuring the Models The diode bridge symbol is now ready for use in Schematics but the model library must also be configured if the design is going to be simulated 1 2 From the Analysis menu select Library and Include Files If the required library is not already in the Library section click Browse 3 4 Example Creating Symbols from Scratch 6 57 Locate the library and click Open to put the library with its path in the File Name field Select either Add Library or Add Library The causes the file to be added as a global library A global library will be available to every schematic until it is removed from the list Local libraries are available only to the active design but can be added to another or made global if needed in the future Creating and Editing Hierarchical Designs Overview This chapter explains the procedures for creating and editing a hierarchical design Many of the pr
62. multiple views For example you can define a part that has a transistor level schematic as one view and a behavioral model schematic as another view Note There are no restrictions on how many views a part can have or on what the views are Hierarchical symbols have one or more views Every hierarchical block or symbol always has a default view that is initialized as the first schematic assigned to it You can change the default view You can create and associate additional views at any time You can modify delete or rename views Each view is associated with a schematic and multiple views can point to the same schematic Translators To take different views of a design configure a translator to look for separate view attributes A translator produces an alternate representation for a schematic For example the Schematics netlister is a translator that operates on a schematic to produce a PSpice netlist A translator typically looks at information carried by the symbols on a schematic and may or may not also use the implicit connectivity Setting Up Multiple Views 7 13 If you are also using PLSyn for programmable logic synthesis you may also configure a view to be the name of a DSL file Refer to the MicroSim PLSyn User s Guide for more information 7 14 Creating and Editing Hierarchical Designs Setting up an associated view for the Translator Orta tian 1 From the Options menu select Translators to display the
63. name of the gate type of a part If a package contains more than one type of gate for example a package that contains an AND gate and a NOR gate then there will be different symbols to represent each type Each of these symbols must have a GATETYPE attribute with a value that is used during packaging to identify the correct pin assignments within the package definition For multi part packages the package definition will contain a set of pin assignments for each gate type The identifiers used in the package definition for each gate type must match the GATETYPE attributes on the symbols The name of the model referenced for simulation This name must match the name of the model or subckt definition of the simulation model as it appears in the Model Library file 1 ib For example if your design includes a 2N2222 bipolar transistor with the model name Q2N2222 then the MODEL attribute on the symbol for that part will be Q2N2222 This MODEL attribute can then be referenced in the TEMPLATE attribute for netlisting TEMPLATE Q REFDES c b e MODEL where REFDES Q1 and MODEL Q2N2222 could result in a netlist entry of Q_Q1 4 6 8 Q2N2222 25 24 25 135 Overview E 3 Attribute See Description Notes PART PKGREF PKGTYPE REFDES In the schematic editor Edit Attributes dialog the MODEL attribute is marked with an asterisk This means that the attribute is not changeable using this dialog You must select M
64. name of the one you are adding in the Library Name text box Be sure the appropriate check boxes are selected to indicate whether you are configuring just the symbol library or the symbol and package library 6 Click Add 7 Click OK Note You may need to modify the Library Path in the upper right corner of the Editor Configuration dialog box to include any directory paths that contain library files you added in the previous dialog When exiting the Editor Configuration dialog box Schematics reloads all of the symbol libraries in the list making the symbols contained in them immediately usable in the schematic editor 6 50 Creating and Editing Symbols Example Creating Symbols from Scratch You can create custom symbols from scratch in Schematics Creating custom symbols includes e drawing the graphics e adding pins e changing the grid size e defining attributes e configuring the new symbol library To quickly create common symbols use the Symbol Creation Wizard see Using the Symbol Wizard on page 6 3 or for examples of creating common symbols by copying existing ones see Creating a Symbol by Copying Another Symbol on page 6 5 or using AKOs see Using AKO Symbols on page 6 7 When creating a symbol it is not The following example demonstrates how to create a symbol for necessary to have already a diode bridge rectifier defined a subcircuit or model The issue of having a model or subcircuit def
65. o 4 66 Zoom Factor Set to 100 with Printer Configured in Portrait Mode 4 66 Zoom Factor Set to 200 with Printer Configured in Portrait Mode 4 67 User definable Zoom Enabled in Portrait Mode 4 68 User definable Zoom Enabled in Landscape Mode 4 69 Pin Types fcc g susi s aue e ansis EN e RR A 6 23 Example of Diode Bridge Rectifier Symbol 6 51 Top level Schematic Drawing for CMOS Inverter 7 20 Schematic of CMOS Inverter e c ecs s 44 6664 004 a ee gee 7 24 A Working Schematic and Two Checkpoint Schematics 9 3 Entire Connector Symbol lt ese gapa 0464864 546685 oo 26 O28 11 4 Sinsle Pin Symbol mama y oe is ba A Oe eek ORES we oe 11 4 Bill of Materials Report be eR NE Ra OR ee 2 11 12 Tables Table 1 1 Table 3 1 Table 3 2 Table 3 3 Table 3 4 Table 3 5 Table 3 6 Table 3 7 Table 4 1 Table 5 1 Table 5 2 Table 5 3 Table 5 4 Table 11 1 Table 11 2 Table 11 3 Table 11 4 Table 11 5 Table E 1 Table F 1 Remaining Parts to be Placed oo o 1 10 Standard Schematics Toolbar o o e ee 3 7 Drawing Toolbar ce s sia paa ME da a Aisa a as 3 9 Simulation Toolbar ra erns k eigi dudas mbr or Gos e aaa 3 10 Annotation Graphics Toolbar o o e 3 12 Schematic Editor Function KeyS usura co BAER a 3 14 Zoned Border Default Decimal Parameters o 3 25 Z
66. references F 6 Symbol Libraries Table F 1 Symbol Libraries continued Symbol Library File Name Contents merndram slb mernram2 slb mernsram slb memory slb misc slb mitmem slb mitram slb mitrom slb mix_misc slb mosel slb moto slb moto7 slb motoramp slb motormos slb motor_rf slb nat_semi slb nscInapp slb Micron Semiconductor Inc DRAM Micron Semiconductor Inc DRAM Micron Semiconductor Inc SRAM EPROM PROM SRAM PAL DRAM EEPROM Timers CMOS transistor arrays variable admittance variable impedance three phase transformers relays DC motor time dependent switches Mitsubishi Electric Corporation EEPROM PROM DRAM SRAM Mitsubishi Electric Corporation DRAM SRAM Mitsubishi Electric Corporation EPROM Timers DC motors relays Mosel Vitolic Inc SRAM FIFO Motorola Corp CPU microcontrollers Motorola Corp SCR triac Motorola Corp operational amplifiers Motorola Corp power MOSFET Motorola Corp RF bipolar transistors National Semiconductor Inc operational amplifiers National Semiconductor Inc video sync generators power drivers level translators display drivers PLL switches noise reduction processors power amplifiers timers Using Symbol Libraries F 7 Table F 1 Symbol Libraries continued Symbol Library File Name Contents nsdram slb nsnetwk slb nsucont sIb oki slb opamp slb opto slb pansonc s
67. root which contains all the pages Translating Hierarchical Schematics To translate a hierarchical schematic translate the topmost sheet Any lower level schematic referenced by sheet symbols will also be translated A 8 Importing OrCAD SDT Schematics Translating Large Designs Large designs may take a very long time to translate To facilitate the translating of large designs a standalone version of the translator orct rans exe is provided Text Size Text sizes on translated schematics or symbols are based on an 8 point font size See Changing Page Size on page 3 23 for information on how to change fonts in Schematics Connecting Signal Via Labels In OrCAD if two wires have the same label the netlister will connect them In Schematics by default this is not the case and you must connect each wire to a port Use the following procedure to change the default behavior to emulate OrCAD Enabling connectivity via labels 1 From the Options menu select Restricted Operations to display the Restricted Operations dialog box Restricted Operations x m Netlisting Opti ES I Append Page number to ERC Options M Show unconnected pin wamings Stimulus Options I Automatically generate digital stimulus for top level input bidirectional interface ports I Show Wamings for top level input bidirectional interf ports without a stimulus defined Cancel Select the Connectivity Via
68. section in the form niltemplate lt prefix gt minimum width ld The default value is nltemplate N_5041d The term ld must be in lowercase If minimum width begins with a zero leading 0 s are added if the number of characters in the node number is less than the minimum width For example N ld would create node numbers N1 N2 N3 instead of N_001 N_002 N_003 Specifying Board Layout Node Name Netlisting Preferences D 3 Specifying Board Layout Node Name Netlisting Preferences To change any of these settings use a text editor and edit the msim ini file in the Windows directory PCBHIERPATHSEP is the separator character to use when creating hierarchal net names in layout netlisting The PCBTEMPLATE item specifies the form that the layout netlister uses for creating node names The default value is PCBTEMPLATE NN_ 04LD D 4 Advanced Netlisting Configuration Items Customizing EDIF Netlists You can change the amount each level in the netlist is indented by changing the EDIFINDENT item in the SCHEMATICS section of the msim ini initialization file Use a text editor to edit the msim ini file in the Windows directory EDIFINDENT specifies the character to use to indent each level in an EDIF netlist The default is EDIFINDENT S Attribute List Overview This appendix is a list of attribute names used by Schematics and descriptions of each of those attributes When you use the sy
69. selection rectangle around the group of objects you want to select Only objects entirely contained within the box are selected Selecting an object attribute 1 Point to the attribute and click Selecting and Moving Objects and Attributes 4 41 A rectangle is drawn around the attribute a selection rectangle also appears around the object that the attribute belongs to De selecting selected objects 1 Click to select an object other than the selected object or click in a blank area of the schematic Moving Moving an object 1 Select an object or group of objects 2 Click the pointer on the object or in the area designated by the selection rectangle Drag the selection to the desired location Release the mouse button to place the object Searching for and Selecting Parts In a large design you may have to find an object to select 1t To save you time Schematics allows you to search for objects and specify search criteria It then selects objects located in the search Use the Find command from the Edit menu to search for an object You can search for parts wires and buses that contain attributes 4 42 Creating and Editing Designs When typing an attribute name and value you can specify an exact value or use wildcards An asterisk is a wildcard that matches zero or more characters For example R matches R R1 and R12 A question mark is a wildcard that matches any single character For exa
70. solutions and mark other checkpoints Probe displays simulation results of all the checkpoints in colors to match the same simulation file including multi run simulations so you can compare results Return to the checkpoint that displayed the best results and continue on with your design marking and comparing other checkpoints to improve your design Design Manager allows you to browse manage archive and restore your design files It organizes all files such as symbols sub schematics and also any non EDA documents associated with your design as a single self contained entity Design Manager gathers this information arranges and displays it in categories that show the relationships of the files to one another Checkpoints in Design Journal with attached notes or even a Microsoft Word file can be archived as components of a single design within Design Manager Orthogonal Rubberbanding makes it easier to rearrange your schematic for new parts and to clean up the schematic when necessary You can move one or more selected objects to a new location while maintaining connectivity Annotation Graphics provides the ability to add non electrical information such as polylines circles arcs and multi line text Bitmap and metafile images can be placed on the schematic or within symbols Getting Started Overview This chapter describes Schematics what it is what it can do and how you can use it This chapter has the following
71. the Message Viewer The Message Viewer displays text describing a condition status or other information concerning the operation of MicroSim programs MicroSim Message Viewer C msim example BEE E Fie Edit View Tools Window Help 18 x dial 20 jes E 2 Severity Origin Time Message Text INFO Schematics 10 26AM Creating PSPICE netlist ERROR Schematics 10 26AM Unlabeled port e ERROR Schematics 10 26AM Unlabeled port INFO Schematics 10 26AM NetlisyERC errors netlist not created 4Messages 2 Error 0 Waming 2 Info The Message Viewer appears when any condition generates a message that requires you to be informed For example warnings and error messages that occur during netlisting will appear in the Message Viewer If you have more than one design open and close one of the open designs the messages pertaining to the design you close no longer display When you close the last design the Message Viewer closes Also the message viewer closes when all MicroSim programs are closed or when you explicitly close it Using the Message Viewer 3 47 The Message Viewer uses all standard Windows controls for scrolling sizing and selecting 3 48 Using the Schematic Editor Another way to view online Help is 1 Right click in the message area to display a menu H 2 Click Help On to view a context sensitive Help message Another way to locate the message source 1 Right click the messa
72. the first lower most wire to be labeled Press Cirl E to label the wire Repeat steps 2 and 3 for each wire segment in the order they are to be labeled from bottom to top 1 14 Getting Started When you place a part on the schematic the part is automatically assigned a reference designator and a gate if it is a multi part component For instance when you placed the 74123 part it was assigned something like U8A that is reference designator U8 and gate A If you placed any of the components in an order other than the sequential order shown in Figure 1 2 use this feature now to change the reference designators to match the schematic in Figure 1 2 Changing Reference Designators and Part Values Change part values and reference designators by double clicking them and typing a new value in the dialog box Changing U8A to U9B 1 Double click USA to display the Edit Reference Designator dialog box 2 Type U9 in the Package Reference Designator text box Type B in the Gate text box Click OK Changing R9 from 1 kohm to 100 kohm 1 Double click 1k next to resistor R9 to display the Set Attribute Value dialog box 2 Change 1k to 100k 3 Click OK Now change the value of R10 to 100k and the values of R3 through R8 to 10k Example Drawing aSchematic 1 15 Moving Parts Wires and Text Move parts wires buses and text by clicking to select them and dragging them to anew location To maintain conn
73. to place the part and close the browser Move the outline of the selected symbol to any location on the schematic and click to place the part Right click to stop placing parts Placing and Editing Parts After you have selected a part you can place one or more instances of the part on the schematic When the part is selected an outline of the selected part appears attached to the pointer Placing a symbol on the schematic 1 Click the Get New Part button to select the part from a symbol library 2 Move the symbol outline to the location you want to place the symbol and click Place as many instances of the symbol as you want by moving to another location and clicking again Each time you point and click another instance of the part is placed on the page Stopping placement To stop placing a symbol do one of the following e Double click to place the last instance of the symbol e Right click to stop placing the symbol without placing an additional symbol The outline changes back to a pointer Placing and Editing Parts 4 9 If you type c in the Part Name text box to select a capacitor you will see an outline of the capacitor symbol attached to the pointer as shown below am See also Repeating Part Placements on page 4 19 and Global Editing of Attributes on page 4 17 4 10 Creating and Editing Designs Rotating a Part R1 AM 1K Default R1 1K Rotated once Rotating and
74. tutorial See examples typographical conventions iV Index 16 U Undo Redo 4 44 UNIX users V unmodeled pins 4 4 8 4 updating the schematic with the PLD s 10 3 user definable zoom factor 4 66 user defined component information 11 15 using AKO symbols 6 7 auto naming 4 22 auto repeat 4 22 back annotation 11 30 Design Manager 2 1 global ports 4 38 interface ports 7 12 marker 8 9 Message Viewer 3 47 MicroSim PLSyn 10 3 schematic editor 3 1 stimulus editor 8 7 symbol in schematic 6 27 this guide iv utilities library compression C 1 library expansion C 1 V value instance specific part 7 17 of attribute 3 4 vertical offset 4 20 view associated 7 14 behavioral model 7 13 definition of Glossary 6 setting up 7 14 setting up multiple 7 13 viewing multiple pages 4 62 page 3 44 particular page 4 62 selected area 3 42 simulation model 8 4 simulation results 8 9 viewpoint definition of Glossary 6 voltage stimulus source 8 7 voltage viewpoint definition of Glossary 6 Voltage Level Marker button 3 10 W Where dialog box 7 16 where to find programs 3 38 wildcard characters 4 6 4 7 4 42 window main 3 6 symbol editor 5 5 5 7 wire definition of Glossary 6 drawing 1 11 3 9 4 28 labeling 1 11 1 13 4 29 4 32 moving 1 15 orthogonal 4 33 rewiring segment 4 29 selecting 4 40 wire segment adding 4 28 wiring symbols 7 23 wizard symbol creation 6
75. will size proportionally Note All imported graphics are imported by reference If you move files that have been imported by reference Schematics will not be able to locate the files to display them Note f you need to move the graphic to another location on the schematic select it and move it as you would any other object 4 58 Creating and Editing Designs Annotation Symbols Creating annotation symbols and adding them to a custom library allows you to easily use them in other designs Creating annotation symbols 1 From the Edit menu select Symbol to start the symbol editor 2 From the File menu select Open Select the existing library where the annotation symbol will be saved 3 From the Part menu select New to display the Definition dialog box Description Part Name Alias list Type annotation g AKO Name F Do not display in Part Browser DK Cancel Add Delete ox a Type a name for the symbol in the Part Name text box b From the Type list select Annotation c Click OK 4 Use the symbol editor to add graphics to the symbol See Drawing Symbol Graphics on page 6 10 Note Because annotation symbols are non electrical do not use pins 5 From the Part menu select Attributes to display the Attributes dialog box Adding Non Electrical Information 4 59 Attributes Viust bottom Size roo DK Cancel Name MODEL Value 100124 Del Attr What to Displ
76. wires 4 28 on the schematic Draw Bus enables the drawing of 4 31 NS buses on the schematic Ej Draw Block enables the placing of 7 4 blocks on the schematic ir Get New Part displays Part Browser 4 6 dialog box for selecting parts for placement Get Recent Part drop down list box to 4 9 Note You can also type the select and place a recent name of the part directly into part without having to the text box open the part browser r Edit Attributes edits the attributes of 4 17 selected objects S Edit Symbol opens the symbol editorfor 5 5 the selected symbol 3 10 Using the Schematic Editor Simulation The Simulation toolbar provides shortcuts for setting up analyses running a simulation and viewing results Refer to the Viewing Results on the Schematic chapter of your PSpice user s guide for further information on simulation in Schematics Simulation x None PLA va NT 5 Table 3 3 Simulation Toolbar Button Name Function Page Analysis Setup sets up simulation analyses 8 8 Z for the active schematic Bi Simulation starts a simulation of the 8 8 ES current schematic pz Marker Color drop down list box to si change marker colors on an instance basis Voltage Level enables placing of voltage Marker level markers on the schematic o Current Marker enables placing of current markers on the schematic pel Enable Bias toggles the display of bias Voltage Display voltage Show H
77. with the same name as the active working file and a file name extension ending in v for example scv slv plv If you have a power outage or system failure you can retrieve your work from these files The temporary files are deleted each time a schematic or library is successfully closed or saved When you open a file Schematics compares the saved file to the autosave file if one is present If the autosave file is more recent than the requested file Schematics provides a warning and allows you to restore the file as the active schematic or library While an autosave is in progress a message appears in the status line and the hourglass symbol displays in place of the pointer Wait until the autosave is finished before continuing Disabling Autosave 1 From the Options menu select Editor Configuration to display the Editor Configuration dialog box shown on 3 22 In the Autosave interval text box type O zero Click OK Configuring Schematics 3 33 3 34 Using the Schematic Editor Controlling the Display in Schematics Schematics allows you to define what elements of a design you want to display and print This means you can set different display properties for each element of your schematic In the Display Preferences dialog box the default colors styles fonts and sizes of each display layer are established You can either display or not display and print or not print the followi
78. 000p slb Xc 3000p slb Xc4000p slb Xc4000ep slb Simulation pseudocomponents IC NODESET etc Averaged switched mode power supply blocks Switched mode regulators Texas Instruments Inc operational amplifier voltage comparators SCR triac UJT Texas Instruments Inc line drivers transceivers display drivers ADC switches Texas Instruments Inc SRAM EPROM DRAM PROM memory controllers Texas Instruments Inc FIFO error detection correction multipliers pipeline registers flip flops bus transceivers memory controllers Transmission lines Multiplexers counters flip flops bus transceivers gates monostable multivibrators encoders FIFO buffers adders decoders VLSI Technology Inc ALU UART memory controllers CPU display drivers Weitek Corp math co processors WaferScale Integration Inc PROM EEPROM CPU multipliers Xilinx FPGAs 2000 Family Xilinx FPGAs 3000 Family Xilinx FPGAs 4000 Family Xilinx FPGAs 4000e Family Table F 1 Symbol Libraries continued Symbol Library File Contents Name Xc5200p slb Xilinx FPGAs 5200 Family xicor sIb XICOR Inc SRAM EEPROM potentiometers xtal slb Quartz crystals zilog slb Zilog Inc I O controllers CPU counters Using Symbol Libraries F 9 Glossary ABM AKO alias annotation annotation symbols attribute back annotation block Analog behavioral model A view of a hierarchical schematic used
79. 04 3 49 Chapter 4 Creating and Editing Designs OVERVIEW 6 285 4 0 4 oe S Ghd CP ea PAD ed e oh e SES eS 4 1 Starting the Schematic Editor se s lt atise Baa PS as BS AER 2 Re wre 4 3 Opening a Piles 6 OR OKO S HEE RROD RHE DE ERE GO 4 3 Finding Parts sasa dr waders da werd a Bode id He ae BEG 4 4 Getting Parts by Name osa as ca S ewe ae PERG owe ee eR OES A 4 5 Searching for Parts in the Libraries s cos s cows ee ee eee 4 6 Placing and Editing Parts lt 4 args See OS RESTS GASES 4 9 Rotating and Flipping Parts 2 2 ee ee ee 4 10 Rotating Pans oae asma amp te eh oa a ee 4 GOR 4 10 Flipping Parts 20 4 aco 4 64 Rae a Ce Ae aS dea 4 11 Editing Part Attributes aae 2 ee ee ee 4 12 Editing Attributes sca sow ode a a AOR oe Ri ee we we we 4 12 Adding Attributes e052 ese ae ba es a ed esos HO Bows 4 14 Deleting Attributes 244 iaa e PES Re EO ale SE Ee 4 14 Changing the Display of Attributes 4 14 Global Editing of Attributes o e 4 17 Editing the Default Attributes of a Symbol 4 18 Repeatine Part Placements as asa Sued bas a e a 4 19 vi Contents Automatically Assigning Reference Designators 4 21 Example Using Auto Repeat and Auto Naming 4 22 Replacing Parts oda 86 4 oe SG awe c h Geo be OOR SSR G5 4 24 Placing Power and Ground Symbols 04 4 26 Placing Power and Ground Symbols
80. 2 Inthe Snap to Pin frame in the Gravity box type the snap Gravity is only functional when to pin gravity value snap to pin is enabled 3 Click OK Grid Spacing Grid Spacing defines the horizontal and vertical grid spacing on your drawing area The default spacing is 10 units This corresponds to 0 10 inches for US standard page sizes and 2 5 millimeters for metric page sizes The minimum grid spacing allowed is 0 01 inch or 25 millimeters Specifying grid spacing 1 From the Options menu select Display Options 2 In the Grid Spacing frame type the grid spacing value shown on page 4 34 3 Click OK Rubberbanding Rubberbanding makes it easier to rearrange your schematic for new parts and clean up the schematic when necessary You can move one or more selected objects to a new location while maintaining connectivity Results vary according to whether Orthogonal is enabled or disabled Figure 4 4 illustrates a rubberbanding move with Orthogonal enabled while Figure 4 5 shows the same move with Orthogonal disabled 4 36 Creating and Editing Designs MZ Roi Saeed Be an poe Tl Ree oa 12 1 QD ie 3 Fi EEPE esa KN OpckKe QC El 3 OB oad 4 Ae 1100000 gal Hrs AA a og A TASOA o o 7480A U er a gaene e mare dra e VE y a AAN EE d labore ac El 5 QC CKB 2 es S A D re oe Thee ce lca wa ee ee OFA pera AZ Re 74904 mE ARRE 7
81. 3 Edit Symbol 4 8 Creating and Editing Designs Libraries Place Note Appendix F Symbol Libraries contains a list of symbol libraries supplied with Schematics and device types 8 Click Place to place the part with the browser remaining open or click Place amp Close to place the part and close the browser Move the outline of the selected symbol to any location on the schematic and click to place the part Right click to stop placing parts Browsing symbol libraries to select a part 1 Click the Get New Part button to display the Part Browser dialog box see 4 6 Note Oneoftwo Part Browser dialog boxes may appear the Part Browser Advanced and the Part Browser Basic If the Part Browser Basic dialog box appears click Advanced to display the Part Browser Advanced dialog box If the Part Browser Advanced dialog box appears click Basic to display the Part Browser Basic dialog box The steps in finding a part by browsing symbol libraries are the same with either dialog box Click Libraries to display the Library Browser dialog box see 3 19 Use the Library Browser dialog box to select a library and view a list of parts contained in each library When you select a part the part name appears in the Part Name text box in the Part Browser dialog box and the part is selected for placing Click OK Click Place to place the part with the browser remaining open or click Place amp Close
82. 3 Delete Page dialog box 4 63 deleting attributes 4 14 package definition 6 45 page 4 63 pin on hierarchical block 7 7 selected object 4 44 6 22 de selecting selected objects 4 41 design components of 3 3 creating 1 2 definition of Glossary 2 editing 1 2 hierarchical 7 3 Glossary 3 methods 7 3 multi sheet 4 60 packaging parts in 11 6 printing 4 64 starting new 1 6 Design Manager 2 1 Index 5 Pin Assignments 6 40 Pin Swaps 6 43 design synthesis language block See DSL block dialog boxes Add Text 4 51 Additional Info 3 49 App Settings 3 38 3 40 Attribute Editing 4 12 Attributes 5 14 6 44 Auto Naming 1 13 4 21 Auto Repeat 4 19 Back Annotate 11 30 Block View 7 8 Change Attribute 4 15 5 12 Change Pin 5 14 6 24 7 7 7 23 Change Text 5 15 6 13 Configure Tools 11 24 Configuring Package Types 6 46 Copy Package Definition 6 36 Copy Page 4 61 Copy Part 4 18 6 5 Create Page 4 60 Definition 6 33 Delete Page 4 63 Display Options 3 30 3 31 4 34 5 8 5 16 Display Preferences 3 36 Edit Attributes 4 59 11 18 Edit Gate Types 6 41 Edit Package Definition 6 35 Edit Package Types 6 38 Edit Reference 7 22 Edit Reference Designator 1 14 7 5 11 7 Editor Configuration 3 18 6 48 Export file specification B 3 Export Parts 6 6 Find 4 42 Font 3 36 Get Package Definition 6 37 Global Edit Attributes 4 17 Graphics Properties 6 15 Import 6 6 Import
83. 4 94 04 0406 6 17 MOVING 22 0 gue ba Phos AAA ws Se amp amp 6 19 RESIZIDS eeaeee 54 Seb eee Seb owed a ed eee ee ao 6 19 Editing Existing Symbols o oo e 6 20 Accessing Symbols ss 25 srrs ee RR ee ee 6 20 Cutting Copyingwand Pastime osa scese eae ee ee he eo Ds 6 21 CUIDE aa spees SES EES CER Bw PES Teg Oe oS 6 21 COPINE 3 ha obs earn Bw bt Bas Dee Le dos Bats was 2 6 21 PASTE os kb Ae ee Ee SR OD we Od ed Se oe oS 6 22 Deleting or 64 we a ee ee Re Oo oe 6 22 Defining and Editing Pin Types esmas erma OSG RO oe aw 6 23 Chapter 7 Contents ix Specifying Pin Types s lt sess SARE RE ORE ME we ER ew ee 6 23 Defining and Editing Hidden Power and Ground Pins 6 27 Changing Symbol Origin and Bounding Box 6 28 ONS sao karer o 4 he does e b oa Bao dw ee wha os 6 28 Bounding Boke ae rentea Se OS oe Ye DE Re OH OEE 6 29 Editing Symbol Attributes 2 oaa o ee ee 6 30 Using Symbol Aliases se is pacs o ER e ES OS 6 33 Specifying Part Packaging Information 4 6 34 Pin Assignment Lists oracion aes soper Boe Gs eb SS OM we GR Ss 6 34 Packaging Definitions s cs s 44 5 eee PRR REE Ow So 6 35 Creating a New Package Definition 0 6 35 Copying a Package Definition o o 6 36 Editing a Package Definition s o cao coce oroas pone mou apaes 6 37 Editing Package Types ax ie eaea ene A E 6 37 Specifying physical pin numbers
84. 47 creating 4 46 creating a custom 4 48 editing 4 46 use 3 4 toolbar buttons Analysis Setup 3 10 Current Marker 3 10 Draw Arc 3 12 5 8 6 10 Draw Block 3 9 7 4 Draw Box 3 12 5 8 6 11 Draw Bus 1 12 3 9 4 22 Draw Circle 3 12 5 8 6 11 Draw Polyline 3 12 5 9 6 11 Draw Text 3 12 4 51 5 9 6 12 Index 15 Draw Text Box 3 12 Draw Wire 1 11 3 9 4 23 Edit Attributes 3 9 4 17 5 9 6 44 7 7 Edit Symbol 3 9 4 18 5 5 Enable Bias Current Display 3 10 Enable Bias Voltage Display 3 10 Get New Part 4 6 5 9 Insert Picture 3 12 4 57 6 13 Marker Color 3 10 More Info 3 49 New File 3 7 4 3 5 8 New Symbol 5 9 6 4 Open File 3 7 4 3 5 8 Place Pins 5 9 6 12 Print 3 7 4 64 Redraw 3 8 3 13 5 7 5 9 Save File 3 7 5 8 7 24 Select Part 1 8 3 9 7 21 Show Hide Currents on Selected Part s 3 10 Show Hide Voltage on Selected Net s 3 10 Simulation 3 10 Voltage Level Marker 3 10 Zoom Area 3 8 3 42 5 8 Zoom In 3 8 3 42 5 8 Zoom Out 3 8 3 42 5 8 Zoom to Fit Page 3 8 3 44 5 8 toolbars 5 8 Annotation Graphics 3 12 display of 3 7 Drawing 3 9 how to dock 3 7 Simulation 3 10 Standard Schematics 3 7 trace properties 11 19 translating hierarchical schematics A 7 large designs A 8 multi page schematics A 7 OrCAD SDT to MicroSim Schematics A 2 schematic 7 13 setting up associated view 7 14 translator 7 13 definition of Glossary 6 Translators dialog box 7 14
85. 4904 Figure 4 4 Rubberbanding with Orthogonal enabled De E cto Bret Po E A GORD1 E 14 T A DORE Te aide a s BJT Ai 1 6 chac A cles SERA Pia romo maaro Al Rees E E woe ee a A c E co POA ar ee ome Ge ee A E ae ra ig Reza Motoras lol creo 2ro100 RA a lio Figure 4 5 Rubberbanding with Orthogonal disabled Using Wires and Buses 4 37 While you are moving an object whether orthogonal is enabled or disabled an X appears where a new connection will be made if the object is placed and the pointer changes to a caution sign see Figure 4 6 below If you continue to move the object away from the connection the X disappears and the pointer returns to normal New connections are formed when e apin wire or bus is placed on another pin wire or bus e the path of a wire or bus crosses over a pin wire segment endpoint or bus segment endpoint Figure 4 6 shows a path with a potential new connection e AQT R92 QA e e jane dos EN CKE QC R01 QD R02 Figure 4 6 Rubberbanded path showing a potential connection Enabling Rubberbanding 1 From the Options menu select Display Options 2 In the Display Options dialog box see 4 34 a Select the Rubberband check box Shortcut press b Select the Orthogonal check box if you want Shortcut press rubberbanding to be orthogonal
86. 8 grid on display options 5 16 H hidden pins 3 5 definition of Glossary 3 editing 6 27 hierarchical block converting to symbol 7 11 creating 7 4 creating a schematic for 7 5 editing 7 4 pin names 7 7 reference designator 7 4 resizing 7 5 selecting 7 15 hierarchical design creating 1 2 7 20 definition of Glossary 3 editing 1 2 methods 7 3 navigating through 7 15 passing information between levels 7 18 hierarchical parts 3 3 hierarchical symbol 7 9 selecting 7 15 horizontal offset 4 20 hotspot definition of Glossary 3 HP users iV Import dialog box 6 6 Import OrCAD File dialog box A 2 B 3 importing annotation graphics 4 57 bitmaps 4 57 graphics 6 13 in the schematic editor 4 57 in the symbol editor 6 13 into Microsoft Word 4 45 metafiles 4 57 OrCAD SDT file A 2 OrCAD SDT schematic A 2 symbol 6 6 indicated severity of message 3 48 insert picture 6 13 Insert Picture button 3 12 4 57 6 13 instance name definition of Glossary 3 interface input ports 7 6 output ports 7 6 port 7 12 interface port definition of Glossary 3 interface ports 4 38 symbols 7 6 interfacing to MicroSim PCBoards 11 19 to other board layout products 11 24 J joining pins and wires 3 5 junction 3 5 definition of Glossary 3 K keyboard 3 14 5 11 L label template 4 32 labeling bus 1 12 4 30 4 31 4 32 global port 4 39 ports 1 17 wire 1 11 1 13 4 29
87. A message area that provides Draws a new wire e abrief description of the function that will be performed if you click the toolbar button at the present pointer location e a brief description of the function to be performed Imports an OrCAD schematic The description will display by selecting the menu item at the present pointer location e prompts and warning messages that only appear when it is necessary for you to take a specific action If anything must be done by the user or if there is a warning the prompt will display in the status bar e the name of the function to be performed when you use the Cmd Show Selected Repeat command the name of the function will display when you use the Repeat function Use the Status Bar selection from the View menu to enable or disable the status bar Refreshing the Screen To refresh the screen click the Redraw button on the toolbar 3 14 Using the Schematic Editor Function keys through are toggle keys Pressing the key enables the feature and pressing plus the key disables the feature Keyboard Table 3 5 lists the function keys in the schematic editor that permit you to enable or disable specific commands Table 3 5 Schematic Editor Function Keys Key Action Menu Selection F1 Online Help Help Help F2 Move to lower level in the Navigate Push schematic hierarchy F3 Move up one level Navigate Pop in the schematic hierarchy F4 Te
88. E ERE PER a CEES OG 8 9 Configuring Probe Display of Simulation Results 8 10 Chapter 9 Using Design Journal OVEIVIEW sua ao ra ea a e a HS 9 1 Understanding Design Journal 2 2 o ooo 9 2 Design Journal Help lt casita nicsak e ade HEE SEE BA 9 3 Chapter 10 Targeting Your Design for Programmable Logic OVEIVICW sia Se Ends hs e a a wd Oe ed 10 1 Targeting PLDs CPLDs Using PLSyn 0 10 2 Using Schematic Symbols to Define Programmable Logic 10 2 Creating and Editing DSL Blocks 0 0 10 2 Simulating a Programmable Logic Design from Schematics 10 3 Using PLS Yi sece a ca s PES Rew eR ME bee hae ew ad Oe oS 10 3 Updating the Schematic withthe PLDs 10 3 Targeting Xilinx FPGAS s s dow e para sonor aira Re oe we 10 4 Entering an FPGA only Design gis escore bce as es oo ws 10 4 Contents xi Entering an FPGA Block in a Mixed Design 10 4 Incorporating an Existing Xilinx Schematic into a Design 10 5 Using an Existing XNF File in a Schematic 10 5 Running XACT step e s eoe a 80 a Ha ea Swe dee ee eh ow 10 5 Running Simulations 2426 44 02080065828 a 10 6 Chapter 11 Preparing Your Design for Board Layout OVEIVICW 4434 644 eG 3 GSO SHEE RE DEES AEE SE ARK EES 11 1 CONMECLORS ep 5 0 Sie de ee o o hd Ae ep Oe OU eh ee we Re a 11 3 Placi Connectors 4 4 G9 he ras OG e 6 oe aa 11 3 Using Connector Symbol
89. EW s bb bo SSR da ERE PES RES aE ORE EERE ES o SE SG a 5 1 COMPONERS 4 4 4 44 Det GH aan hes dd Beh ae aie bBo du 5 3 Symbols 434 684 66 0 456 044 5A RASS 2 HHS SRE DEES 5 3 Packaging Information eose coca ee ee ee ew e 5 3 FOOUSTINIS gt rara dd a BOS A Oo OE HO OVE SE EO 5 4 simulation Models 24 34 244 c84 S2d ae 2446604 4 a 5 4 Startine the Symbol Editor s ro itos dde BEG Bhs BS Re 5 5 Loading a Library for Editing o 5 5 Saying your Changes i pcs aio ah Soke Eo es edo ae 5 6 Returning to the Schematic Editor o oo 5 6 Starting Automatically 0455 sae ae os Hew A e Boe ous 5 6 Symbol Editor WindoW 1 044 2 66685 ba eS sede eee Hea ae 5 7 Refreshing the Screen ee ee 5 7 Menus o de ed cra y SOOO Sa we e Gee 5 7 Toolbar sie 664 aden Ped wuld a Bed a E ahs 5 8 Wile Bat 4 2 4 S40 G64 then bE 2 HARASS SHADE OE SHAG EH 5 10 Keyboard Ces ccd a anya ee Oe HR we hme BU oe ew a 5 11 Changing Text Characteristics moria son 6 ee de OE 6 oe A de BORG 5 12 Attribute Text se Sa las OES Rw e PES Be oa Ele ee wo 5 12 Pin Nameand Number dto Des Bond fe ae Bak Oe Sk Bes wm 5 14 Free Standing Text 22 daa cee dea OR Ee RR ee 5 15 Changing Grid and Gravity cmo ei bw Som a ee ee Gee eR E 5 16 Grd One ae miras eos GR wd E Odd ae a ae 5 16 viii Contents Chapter 6 Stay on Gnid s pen e Rae SR PRE PRR ER we PEN Gee EES 5 16 Snap O Ord a is hee AE a hate hb Eth ee Feat oe en 5 17 Grd Sp
90. Flipping Parts In Schematics you can rotate and flip mirror parts or entire areas of a schematic A rotated part is rotated 90 counter clockwise A flipped part is mirrored about the Y axis Rotating and flipping can occur during one of the following e while dragging before placement e after placement Rotating Parts Rotating a part before placing it 1 Select a part to be placed 2 Press Ctrl R to rotate it while still in the drag mode The image rotates 90 counter clockwise Each time you press Ctrl R the image will rotate 90 counter clockwise Rotating an already placed part 1 Select the part 2 Press CtrlJ R to rotate it 90 counter clockwise Rotating an area of the schematic Drag the pointer to select and outline the area to be rotated 2 Press Ctr HR to rotate the area The selected area rotates 90 counter clockwise about the center point of the selected area Flipping Parts Flipping a part before placing it 1 Select the part to be placed 2 Press Ctrl F to flip it The symbol outline is a mirror image of the original image Each time you press CtrI F the image will flip about the vertical axis Flipping an already placed part 1 Select the part 2 Press Ctrl F to flip it Flipping an area of the schematic 1 Drag the mouse to select and outline the area to be flipped 2 Press Ctri F to flip the area about its vertical axis Placing and Editing Parts 4 11
91. LOG i In the Library list box select port slb In the Part list box select GLOBAL which is the name of a global port symbol Click OK In the Part Browser dialog box click Place amp Close Move the pointer to the location for the DAT port and click to place the part Right click to stop placing ports Example Drawing a Schematic 1 17 Labeling the port 1 Double click the port symbol to display the Set Attribute Value dialog box 2 Type DAT in the LABEL text box 3 Click OK Now place two more ports and label them CLK and RTN as shown in Figure 1 2 Placing Power and Ground Symbols Power and ground symbols are types of global port symbols in Schematics The label on the port defines the name of the power supply Placing 5 volt power supplies Type 5V in the Get Recent Part list box on the toolbar BV Press to select the part Move the pointer to the location of the 5V symbol and click to place the symbol 4 Move the pointer and click to place the other nine 5V symbols 5 Right click to stop placing parts All signals tied to power supplies of the same name are connected 1 18 Getting Started GND Placing ground symbols 1 2 3 In the Get Recent Part list box on the toolbar type 1 Press to select the part EGND Move the pointer to the location of the ground symbol and click to place the symbol Move the pointer and click to place the other four ground symbols
92. MicroSim Schematics Schematic Capture Software User s Guide a MicroSinm MicroSim Corporation 20 Fairbanks Irvine California 92618 714 770 3022 Version 8 0 June 1997 Copyright 1997 MicroSim Corporation All rights reserved Printed in the United States of America TradeMarks Referenced herein are the trademarks used by MicroSim Corporation to identify its products MicroSim Corporation is the exclusive owners of MicroSim PSpice PLogic PLSyn Additional marks of MicroSim include StmEd Stimulus Editor Probe Parts Monte Carlo Analog Behavioral Modeling Device Equations Digital Simulation Digital Files Filter Designer Schematics PLogic PCBoards PSpice Optimizer and PLSyn and variations theron collectively the Trademarks are used in connection with computer programs MicroSim owns various trademark registrations for these marks in the United States and other countries SPECCTRA is a registered trademark of Cooper amp Chyan Technology Inc Microsoft MS DOS Windows Windows NT and the Windows logo are either registered trademarks or trademarks of Microsoft Corporation Adobe the Adobe logo Acrobat the Acrobat logo Exchange and PostScript are trademarks of Adobe Systems Incorporated or its subsidiaries and may be registered in certain jurisdictions EENET is a trademark of Ecker
93. Note Converting a block toa symbol is a one way process After you convert a block into a symbol you cannot change that symbol back into a block 7 12 Creating and Editing Hierarchical Designs Using Interface Ports When you use a block or symbol to represent an underlying schematic connections to the underlying schematic are made by means of the pins on the block or symbol The pins on the block or symbol must correspond to interface ports placed on the underlying schematic that is for each pin there must be a corresponding interface port with the same name as the pin If a bus is connected to the block or symbol the pin name must indicate the number of signals such as CLK 0 3 The interface port would have the same name such as CLK 0 3 If you make changes to the pins on a block or symbol you must make the corresponding changes on any underlying schematics it represents If you You Must add a pin add an interface port with the same name as the pin delete a pin delete the corresponding interface port change the name ofa change the label of the corresponding pin interface port There are three interface port symbols available in port slb lt Q gt INTERFACE You can use the symbol editor to create custom interface ports Setting Up Multiple Views A view is an underlying representation of a hierarchical block or symbol A block can have more than one underlying representation by having
94. OS inverter and a lower level schematic for the inverter Follow this example to create the top level circuit shown in Figure 7 1 and the inverter schematic shown in Figure 7 2 SINV IN OUT V1 Ri lt ik wo o Figure 7 1 Top level Schematic Drawing for CMOS Inverter Drawing the Top Level Schematic To create the top level schematic start by placing a VSRC power supply connected as an input to a block representing a CMOS inverter Draw the block place a resistor and two ground symbols and connect the components Example Creating a Hierarchical Design 7 21 Placing the voltage source 1 5 Click the Get New Part button to display the Part Browser dialog box Part Browser Basic Part Name esto Description Simple voltage source AC DC Transient may be specified Close Place W1890 125C Place amp Close W1890 25C RAD w1890 27C Hel w1890 75C Hep W22385 55C 2238541250 w22385 27C WA0T AM Libraries WATCH1 Whreak a Advanced gt gt WIDTH HI sl Full List Enter VSRC in the Part field Click Place amp Close Move the part symbol to the desired location and click to place the symbol Right click to stop placing parts Creating the block representing the CMOS inverter 1 Click the Draw Block button to change the pointer to a rectangle The rectangle represents the block to be drawn Press Ctri R to rotate the re
95. Parts Utility and Using the Model Editor Text Editor sections of the Creating Models chapter in your PSpice user s guide Adding and Defining Stimulus 8 7 Adding and Defining Stimulus The Stimulus Editor is a utility that enables you to set up and verify the input waveforms for a transient analysis You can create and edit voltage sources current sources and digital stimuli for your circuit Menu prompts guide you to provide the necessary parameters such as the rise time fall time and period of an analog repeating pulse or the complex timing relations with repeating segments of a digital stimulus Graphical feedback enables you to verify the waveform Placing Stimulus Sources Stimulus sources come from the source slb symbol library and are one of e VSTIM voltage stimulus source for transient analysis e ISTIM current stimulus source for transient analysis e DIGSTIM digital stimulus source You can place any of these sources by typing the name of the source in the Get Recent Part list box on the toolbar The AC and DC sources are VAC and VDC and can be placed similarly 1 Double click in the Get Recent Part list box and type the name of the source Press and click to place the source Right click to stop placing sources Using the Stimulus Editor For information on using the Stimulus Editor refer to Stimulus Editor Utility in the Transient Analysis chapter in your PSpice View the Stimulus Editor Help for u
96. Paste function Only the last objects cut are retained Cutting a selected object 1 Select the object to cut 2 From the Edit menu select Cut Copying Copy makes a copy of the selected object for pasting The selected object remains on the schematic and a copy is placed in the buffer Copying a selected object 1 Select the object to copy 2 From the Edit menu select Copy Editing Existing Symbols 6 21 Shortcut press Ctrl x Shortcut press Ctrl C 6 22 Creating and Editing Symbols Shortcut press Ctri V Pasting Paste places one or more copies of the last object stored in the buffer from a cut or copy operation onto the drawing Pasting an object 1 From the Edit menu select Paste to change the pointer to the shape of the object that was last cut or copied 2 Click to place the object on the schematic Continue moving the pointer to various locations and clicking to place additional copies of the object 3 To stop pasting the object do one of the following e Double click to paste the last instance of the object e Right click to stop pasting without pasting another object With Auto Repeat enabled use to place repeated copies of items from the buffer without using the Paste function Deleting Delete removes an object or set of objects A deleted object cannot be copied or pasted Deleting a selected object 1 Select the object to delete 2 Press Delete Defining and Editing
97. Select one of the following options e Click Select All to export all pages of the schematic file e Select one of the entries in the Pages dialog box to export a specific set of pages e Select the Selected Area Only check box to export the currently highlighted selection in the schematic editing area 3 Click OK to display the Export File Specification dialog box Export File Specification Save in Y Example E c E E File name source dxf Save as type AutoCAD Files dxf Cancel 4 Specify the export file name and format and click OK to begin exporting B 3 File Menu EJ Draw Navigate New Open Close Import To select more than one page hold down while selecting other pages Note The Selected Area Only option is only enabled if an area is selected in the drawing area before the Export menu command is chosen B 4 Exporting DXF Files File Menu EJ exit Draw Navigate New Open Close Import To select more than one symbol hold down while selecting other pages Note The Current Symbol Only option is only enabled if a specific symbol was selected in the drawing area before the Export menu item was chosen Exporting in the Symbol Editor 1 From the File menu select Export to display the Export dialog box Schematics Export x Pages Select All Cancel 2 Select one of the following options e Click Select All to ex
98. Select or clear the Snap to Pin check box to enable or disable snap to pin 3 Click OK Grid Spacing Grid Spacing defines the horizontal and vertical grid spacing on your drawing area The default spacing is 10 units This corresponds to and displays as 0 10 inches for US standard page sizes and 2 5 millimeters for metric page sizes The minimum grid spacing allowed is 0 01 inch or 25 millimeters Specifying grid spacing 1 From the Options menu select Display Options 2 In the Grid Spacing frame type the grid spacing value 3 Click OK Gravity The gravity setting specifies how close an object must be to a pin to snap to it Gravity is only functional when snap to pin is enabled Specifying gravity 1 From the Options menu select Display Options 2 Inthe Snap to Pin frame type the snap to pin gravity value 3 Click OK Configuring Schematics 3 31 Display Options x E M Rubberband M Snap to Grid Y Orthogonal M SnaptoPin M Cursor X and Y M Stay on Grid rM Grid Spacing Grid Size 199 19 in m Text Grid M Stay on Grid Grid Size 00 02 in Snap to Pin Gravity 00 01 in Cancel Gravity is only functional when snap to pin is enabled 3 32 Using the Schematic Editor Text Grid Text Grid allows you to set the grid spacing for text separately from the drawing grid spacing The text grid is usually set to some smaller percentage of the drawing grid T
99. Text 1 User Text 2 Wires 4 54 Creating and Editing Designs 3 Click the Text tab General Graphics Text Font Modem Size 0 12 Es 2 048 wan Coto m Frame Color None widh Style Jo Fill None I Rounded Comers Note Changes made in the Select the appropriate properties Display Preferences dialog 5 Click Apply to apply the changes immediately and keep the box become the default dialog box open for further changes or click OK to apply settings for all schematics the changes and close the dialog box but may be changed at any time Graphics Adding Graphics Graphics can be added directly onto your schematic Adding annotation graphics Annotation Giaprics 1 From the Draw menu select arc box circle or polyline 0 O c Em See Editing Existing Symbols on page 6 20 for a description f th ilabl hi d how t te them The Annotation Graphics toolbar EA Bean A a is available for placing graphics on your schematic Adding Non Electrical Information 4 55 Resizing annotation graphics 1 Select the object to display its handles 2 Click one of the handles and drag to resize the object Changing Graphics Properties There are two ways to change the graphics properties in Schematics e changing properties can be changed on an instance basis through the Graphics Properties dialog box e setting the defaults for all annotation graphics properties in the Display P
100. The symbol editor enables you to do the following tasks e create and edit symbols for use in the schematic editor e edit existing libraries e create new libraries This chapter provides background information about the symbol editor which includes Starting the Symbol Editor on page 5 5 describes procedures for starting and closing the symbol editor Symbol Editor Window on page 5 7 describes the use of menus the Toolbar and toolbar buttons the status line and the keyboard 5 2 Using the Symbol Editor Changing Text Characteristics on page 5 12 describes procedures for changing the text characteristics of attribute text pin name and number display and free standing text Changing Grid and Gravity on page 5 16 describes enabling and disabling grid setting grid spacing setting gravity and using text grid Zooming and Panning on page 5 20 references the zoom and pan features of the symbol editor Printing Symbols on page 5 21 describes how to print the symbols created with the symbol editor Components 5 3 Components A component or device has several aspects associated with it e symbol the graphical representation used in drawing schematics e packaging information defines the names of the package types footprints in which the component is available the pin number assignments for those package types and the number of gates for multi gate components e footprint used for board layout e
101. Wire Labels check box Click OK Differences between OrCAD SDT and Schematics A 9 Differences between OrCAD SDT and Schematics Although Schematics makes every attempt to translate the schematic completely there may be discrepancies in the resulting schematic depending on how certain features of OrCAD SDT were used Go through any errors and warnings that occur during the translation in addition to reviewing the resulting schematic Here are the differences to be considered when translating your OrCAD SDT schematic Ports e Schematics has fixed size ports that is they do not resize based on the label When an OrCAD SDT schematic is translated port symbols are created for each port size e In OrCAD SDT you can have ports with multiple connections This is translated as two ports overlaid with pins facing opposite directions Wires and buses e InSchematics wires connect directly to buses without using special symbols such as bus entries Buses must be labeled with the set of signals they represent Wires connected to buses must be labeled with the signal name within the bus that they correspond to Therefore during translation OrCAD SDT Bus Entry objects are converted into regular wires or buses Prior to translation when drawing bus rippers you must use the OrCAD SDT Bus Entry object If you draw a typical wire at an angle to look like the regular bus ripper or entry object the wire will not be connected to t
102. a new file and a new symbol Keep in mind that new also means undefined Answering yes adds the file to the list of symbol libraries that Schematics reads in each time it is started 6 52 Creating and Editing Symbols This example does not use AKOs or aliases This produces a finer drawing grid approximately 02 inches between grid dots It does not matter where you begin drawing because it can be moved later The type of the part the part type is most commonly component as it is in this example An AKO or alias use AKO if you want it to inherit the graphics and attributes from another symbol Use Alias to assign additional names that this symbol can be used for Drawing the Graphics After the symbol has a definition the next step is to draw the graphics For this example it is possible to copy the graphics from the regular diode symbol however that particular graphic is oriented vertically and horizontally while this example calls for one that is at a 45 degree angle To draw the graphics 1 From the Options menu select Display Options and set the Grid Spacing to 00 02 a If not already enabled select Stay on Grid b If not already enabled select Snap to Grid Enabling these features will assist in lining up the segments of the symbol c Click OK 2 From the Graphics menu select Draw Polyline to change the cursor to a pencil Draw the diode that is located in the upper right part of th
103. a selected workspace Starting the Design Manager The Design Manager is automatically opened and minimized when you open any MicroSim program Activate it by clicking the MicroSim Design Manager icon on the task bar You can also open Design Manager to view and manage files when other MicroSim programs are not open Opening the Design Manager outside of MicroSim programs 1 On the task bar click the Start button 2 Point to Programs 3 Point to the MicroSim folder 4 Click MicroSim Design Manager Design Manager opens with the Category view in effect Hints and Tips e To get optimal use of Design Manager place only files related to one design in one workspace e Itis beneficial to perform file management functions within Design Manger rather than Windows Explorer Design Manager can perform operations on a design file and all of its dependent files simultaneously Design Manager Help Refer to Schematics Help and Design Manager Help for procedures on how to use Design Manager Starting the Design Manager 3 2 7 Using the Schematic Editor Overview This chapter provides background information about the schematic editor For specific step by step instructions for creating a design see Chapter 4 Creating and Editing Designs This chapter has the following sections Components of a Design on page 3 3 introduces and explains the components of a design Main Window on page 3 6 describes the user inte
104. acing sco 2a hae o ADA 5 17 GRAVY sos ma ee Oe Or Oe Bone ee we Shae oo aa 5 17 Text Gid saasa oops 36 SR Ob ID 2 EPO A 5 19 Zooming and Panning saoe ia he A ek Se GO BO a ee 5 20 Pinung Symbols srs Sun Bing ude eins GMP Be Revs oh Bre an exw amp 5 21 Creating and Editing Symbols OVEIVIEW yo ing a diane Gok BSG we be SG owed a Qe ead 6 1 Creating New Symbols 0 20044 844 4044444005 P44 dea oo 6 3 Using the Symbol Wizard sea sa ssemma 48 24 655 4 Bee ea we 6 3 Creating a Symbol by Copying Another Symbol 6 5 Making a Copy ot aSymbol o sos e ake bp oe e Ske Gee Soke etd 6 5 Importing a symbol definition o e 6 6 Using AKO Symbols su 5 nio is Be a wet GS 6 7 Drawing Symbol Graphics o ee ee 6 10 Elements of a Symbol na 6 a 26 4 a se ds as 6 10 Aunoa e e oe bh dd eed oe SOG 2 EOS OG 2S 6 10 BOX 4 2 66 5406 4 So 4 ESR BEG ee a aR Be EES S 6 11 Ciele riscos door reir A AAA 6 11 POLYUOS ens ea ram e a A 6 11 PMS drid AGE o OSES A A ee a 6 12 TERE 2 5 Gap amp amp Oa Gf GARE Oe PRES EUS G SER HES Go PERS 6 12 o AA Be bre OE Cee Bod he ann Wak Aa Sed H 6 13 Selecta omiso Kb G SS Pa DEDEDE SO OS EDD aS SE OO 6 14 Paling Shapes sacra Ba EOS E Boke eke a oe 6 15 Ordering Drawing Objects 2 0 0 0 2 0 arua onama 6 16 Rotating and Flipping Elements 0 6 17 Rotating Elements s a 2 446 4 0 PERS EG BH 4 ORS 6 17 Flipping Elements so 6 65645 45 63046486
105. ae a Oe eR aa OE we RM 1 2 Example Drawing a Schematic s saos ecce cacra sace tace taia ti 1 4 Starting a New Design s o caeou aaay aaa R eee 1 6 Command Line Opon 4 4 4 4 4 54 5 da Via a aS 1 6 Checking Symbol Libraries Configuration 1 7 Selecting and Placing Parts s s cos os scoas eaa eu a e a 1 8 Drawing and Labeling Wires o o e 1 11 Drawing and Labeling Buses o caoi ecse d o o 1 12 Changing Reference Designators and Part Values 1 14 Moving Parts Wires and Text o ooo 1 15 Placing POMS e cs susc ese Pes ds ei sa Ek ee 1 16 Placing Power and Ground Symbols o 1 17 Saving VOU WOK is dada o Sa ae ss Gon ew cda de 1 18 Using Design Manager OVERVIEW e siup gk ce eke Ge Hew ar Berd Ba Ghee tee te he gant eA 2 1 Understanding Design Manager 00 00000 eae 2 2 Managing Your Files in the Workspace o o 2 4 Design Manager Functions e 2 5 Starting the Design Manager eos rios e e BEE eS 2 7 iv Contents Hints and Tips sees g eag ORG bw eo ERE RA 2 7 Design Manager Help o c ce 444 484 4 4 05445453 8404 045 05 2 7 Chapter 3 Using the Schematic Editor OVERVIEW ocos s sun Soh ani es AO SSS a ob He a rs S 3 1 Components ofa Design cse s ses aa spaa aate aae en 3 3 Pants sc ur Sa Boo ek a See Emacs Ai 3 3 SYMDOIS 6 4 44 6 4 dn dado DADS a Ee a 3 4 POS e oe eB rn O
106. alue dialog box Set Attribute Value Lx LABEL Cancel 2 Type the label in the LABEL text box 3 Click OK Editing a wire label Use the following procedure to edit existing labels 1 Double click the wire or the label to display the Set Attribute Value dialog box with the existing label displayed in the LABEL text box 2 Edit the existing label or delete it and type in a new label Rewiring The Rewire function reroutes a selected wire or bus segment without disconnecting its end points The results of rewiring depend on the Rubberbanding setting see Rubberbanding on page 4 35 1 From the Draw menu select Rewire to change the pointer to a cross symbol 2 Click the wire segment that you want to change 3 Click to place a vertex Using Wires and Buses 4 29 Note A wire connected to a bus must be labeled with one of the signals on the bus By default wires with the same label are not treated as connected If you want to connect them you must connect each wire to an off page port with the same label To change the default 1 Select Restricted Operations from the Options menu 2 Select the Connectivity Via Wire Labels check box 3 Click OK Shortcut press Ctrl D 4 30 Creating and Editing Designs 4 Double click to place the last vertex and stop rewiring Drawing and Labeling Buses Note Buses must be labeled The connectivity of buses and bus segments in Schematic
107. ame gt lt netname gt attribute to 3 6 Using the Schematic Editor Main Window When you start Schematics a schematic editor window opens and displays a single schematic page You have the option of opening additional schematic editor windows Use these windows to e display different schematics e display different portions of a single schematic page e display different pages of the same schematic e display different levels of hierarchy from the same schematic e display a separate symbol editor window Menus Note Drop down menu items The display and operation of the menus and submenus in sometimes appear dimmed Schematics follows a standard Windows layout and operation In some cases you must select an object first or perform some other operation before you can choose unavailable items Toolbars Toolbar buttons provide shortcuts for performing common actions All toolbars are dockable so they may be moved to any location on the schematic Standard Schematics The Standard Schematics toolbar provides shortcuts to standard Windows commands Standard Schematics 0 S a e aja 2 E y ajajaja Table 3 1 Standard Schematics Toolbar Button Name Function Page New File opens a new schematic file 4 3 Open File opens an existing 4 3 schematic file Save File saves a schematic file 4 70 Print prints the active schematic 4 64 immediate ve Cut deletes a selected object 4 43 and
108. an be communicated to MicroSim PCBoards and automatically applied to the layout Refer to the Applying Forward ECOs section in the MicroSim PCBoards User s Guide for details 11 24 Preparing Your Design for Board Layout Interfacing to Other Board Layout Products Schematics creates layout netlists in the formats shown in Table 11 4 Table 11 4 Supported Layout Packages and File Formats Package Layout Netlist ECO File PCBoards nlf bco PADS pad eco P CAD alt none Protel pro eco Tango tan eco CADSTAR cdn rin SCICARDS upl Sif EDIF 200 edf none Selecting a layout format 1 From the Tools menu select Configure Layout Editor to display the Configure Tools dialog box Configure Tools xj PCBOARDS Layout Netlist Format Netlist File Extension nlf ECO File Extension bco Layout Editor Command Line C Amsim peboards exe Cancel 2 From the Layout Netlist list Select a format The layout netlist will be created with the name lt schematic gt lt netlist file name extension gt Interfacing to Other Board Layout Products 11 25 3 Click OK Creating a Layout Netlist 1 From the Tools menu select Create Layout Netlist Layout Mapping Files When creating layout netlists Schematics uses mapping files These files let you customize the handling by the layout netlister of part net and package type names Mapping files are text files that you can edit with any text e
109. an exhaustive list Adding a package type for a component To add a new package type to the list of available package types for the component 1 From the Packaging menu select Edit to display the Package Definition dialog box with the values for the symbols listed Example Package Definition Package Name AKO of Gates 1 Hof Gate Types 1 Package Types DIP14 Pin Assignments Gates Gate Type 1 pint 1 pin2 2 pin3 3 Shared Pins Pin Swaps Lx Change AKO Edit Gate Types Edit Package Types Edit Pins Edit Shared Pins Edit Pin Swaps Print Help Cancel Click Edit Package Types to display the Edit Package Types dialog box Edit Package Types ix Configured Package Types pre y Packages Type s per Pin Assigment A DIP14 E Delete OK Cancel In the Package Types per Pin Assignment text box type the name of the package for example DIP14 or select a type from the Configured Package Types scroll list Click Add Click OK Specifying Part Packaging Information 6 39 6 In the Package Definition dialog box click OK If there are multiple package types with the same pin outs you can type them all on the same line separating them with commas for example DIP 14 S014 Otherwise repeat steps 3 and 4 for each package type 6 40 Creating and Editing Symbols Edit Pins Note Pin numbers can be alphanumeric Specifying physical pin numbers For ea
110. analog slb plb opto slb plb port slb 1_SHOT slb eval sib 1 8 Getting Started One of two Part Browser dialog boxes may appear the Part Browser Advanced or the Part Browser Basic If in the Part Browser Advanced dialog appears click lt lt Basic to display the Part Browser Basic The Full List in the Part Browser dialog box represents all the parts in the configured symbol libraries that are available for your use Another method of selecting a partis to use the Get Recent Part list box on the toolbar You can scroll and select a previously placed part or you can type the name of the part you want to place R J 74L504 g AAN25A4 GLOBAL 2n2222 g Selecting and Placing Parts 1 From the Draw menu select Get New Part to display the Part Browser dialog box Part Name js Description bubble Close BY 100101 Pl 100102 SES 100107 100118 100122 Hel 100124 Hep 100125 100130 100131 100136 Libraries 100141 100150 100151 Advanced gt gt 100155 d Full List There are several ways to select a part in the Part Browser dialog box e If you know the name of the part type the name in the Part Name text box e Select the part name from the Full List of part names e Click Libraries to view the Library Browser dialog box select a library and select the part name from that library s list of parts Click Place to place the part wit
111. ancel By default the Enable Auto Repeat check box is disabled the Horizontal Offset spacing is set to 00 00 and the Vertical Offset is set to 00 10 4 20 Creating and Editing Designs Note Use F8 and lt Shift F8 to enable and disable Auto Repeat respectively If you do not need to change the offsets this is a convenient way to quickly place arrays of parts and wires Horiz Offset 00 00 Horiz Offset 00 00 Vertical Offset 00 30 Vertical Offset 00 50 os B Al Ha i yy o R2 iy A Ra 4k AS A WA Ae 1 a R4 Ae Ai R2 AS Ad AS Horiz Offset 00 30 ARA AAA AWA ARA ARA Vertical Offset 00 00 ik ik ik ik ik f Ri R2 Ra R4 Horiz Offset 00 50 Aig ARA AAN ARA Vertical Offset 00 100 1k ik ik ik Figure 4 1 Placing Resistors with Various Vertical and Horizontal Offsets Select the part from the symbol library Place the first instance of the part Press once to place each subsequent instance of the same part Manually repeating part placements 1 If Auto Repeat is not enabled press to repeat the last action If the last action was placing a part pressing changes the pointer to the symbol outline of the last part placed 2 Move the symbol outline to any location on the schematic and click to place the part 3 To stop placing the part do one of the following e Double click to place the last instance of the part Placing and Editing Parts 4 21 e Right c
112. and between levels of hierarchy They play an important role in determining names of electrical nets Attributes Parts ports wires nets buses and most other symbols have associated attributes An attribute consists of a name and an associated value Attributes are used for Bill of Materials reports and simulation and layout netlists Annotations Text graphics and annotation symbols are used to show non electrical information on the schematic such as comments and tables Annotation symbols primarily consist of text and graphics Title blocks and page borders are considered annotations For more information on adding annotations to your schematic see Adding Non Electrical Information on page 4 50 Components of a Design 3 5 Connections Parts and ports contain one or more pins where connections are made Electrical connections are formed by wire and bus segments joining pins and other wire and bus segments Connections are also formed by attaching pins directly to pins Schematics represents each such electrical connection by a junction Junctions are made visible when three or more connected items converge at the junction Junctions are created and removed automatically Some parts have hidden pins Hidden pins are most often used for power and ground connections to digital parts Hidden pins are not connected by wires and buses but rather through an attribute that names the net which they belong the IPIN lt pinn
113. another or from one platform to another without having to transfer the entire symbol library 1 From the Part menu select Export to display the Export Parts dialog box Creating New Symbols 6 7 Export Parts Part Name File Name C msim lib 400 AKO 00 a 7401 AKO 01 7402 AKO 02 7403 AKO 03 OK 7404 AKO 04 x 7405 AKO 05 i Close 2 Inthe Part Name text box enter the name of the symbol to be exported or select it from the list 3 Inthe File Name text box enter the name of the file to which the part definition is to be written 4 Click OK Using AKO Symbols Some of the MicroSim symbol libraries are made up of a few base symbols and several AKO A Kind Of symbols In the bipolar slb symbol library for example the qnpn and qpnp symbols are base symbols All other symbols reference one of these two base symbols A base symbol must be contained in the same library as the AKO symbols that reference it Base symbols do not however have to be displayed in the Part Browser If you copy an AKO symbol from another library see Creating a Symbol by Copying Another Symbol on page 6 5 you must also copy its base symbol Creating a base symbol in a custom symbol library 1 From the Part menu in the symbol editor select New 6 8 Creating and Editing Symbols 5 Description fo Part Name Alias list Type component 7 AKO Name Poo T Do not display in Part Browser
114. aper 11x 8 1 2 11 x8 1 2 B size 17x11 11x81 2 11x81 2 Schematic Page Printed Paper Figure 4 14 User definable Zoom Enabled in Landscape Mode Printing Your Design 4 69 4 70 Creating and Editing Designs File Menu EN exit Draw Navigate View j New Open Close Import Export Save Ctrl S Save As Checkpoint Print Print Setup Edit Library Symbolize Reports View Messages F10 1 Schematicl sch 2 d msim8 lib DIG_ECL sib 3 D msim8 Example sch 4d msim8 lib 4NALOG slb Exit x File Menu EJ Draw Navigate View New Open Closing the Schematic Editor You can close the schematic editor thereby closing all open schematics You can also close an open schematic without exiting the schematic editor Closing the schematic editor To exit the schematic editor and close all currently open schematics do one of the following e From the File menu select Exit e In the upper right corner of the schematic editor window click the Close button You will be prompted to save any unsaved open schematics Closing a schematic To close a schematic without closing the schematic editor e Select Close from the File menu e In the upper right corner of the design window click the Close button If the current schematic has not been saved you will be prompted to save it Using the Symbol Editor Overview
115. ards MicroSim PCBoards is a PCB layout editor that enables you to interactively specify printed circuit board structure as well as the components metal and graphics required for fabrication Designs created in Schematics can be easily transferred to PCBoards for layout Placement and trace properties are specified on the schematic for use by PCBoards Schematic and board layout changes are automatically tracked forward and backward annotation capabilities help to maintain consistency between the schematic and the layout Specifying Trace Properties You can specify trace widths clearances and padstacks to be used for vias for routing You do this by adding the attributes shown in Table 11 2 to wires on the schematic Table 11 2 Trace Properties Attributes Attribute Description NET_TRACE_ WIDTH Width in mils or mm of trace segments in this net If units are not specified the value is interpreted as inches NET_CLEARANCE Edge to edge space in mils or mm between the trace segments and other layout objects If units are not specified the value in interpreted as inches NET_PADSTACK Name of the padstack definition to be used for vias when routing traces To specify one or more of the preceding trace properties for a net 1 Select any segment of a wire that is part of the net Creating a Layout Netlist for MicroSim PCBoards Checklist 1 Check that PCBoards is the configured layout editor using the C
116. aries Refer to Configuring Symbol Libraries on page 3 16 Finding Parts 4 5 Getting Parts by Name The Get Recent Part list box on the toolbar provides a list of the most recently used parts You can also type a name in the Get Recent Part list box to select a part Selecting a part by name 1 Inthe Get Recent Part list box type the name of the part you PY want to place Press Enter Move the outline of the selected symbol to any location on AAA the schematic and click to place the part Re 4 Right click to stop placing parts Placing a previously selected part After you select a part for placement the part name is listed in the Get Recent Part list on the toolbar and can easily be recalled 1 Click the Get Recent Part list arrow R 74L504 A scrollable list appears containing the names of the last ten AAN25A parts that have been placed ae Click the name of the part you want to place Move the outline of the selected symbol to any location on the schematic and click to place the part 4 Right click to stop placing parts 4 6 Creating and Editing Designs Note One of two Part Browser dialog boxes may appear the Part Browser Advanced or the Part Browser Basic If the Part Browser Basic dialog box appears click Advanced to display the Part Browser Advanced dialog box If the Part Browser Advanced dialog box appears click Basic to display the Part Browser Basic dialog box The steps to f
117. ataclk wire j R 1 Click the Draw Wire button The pencil pointer indicates that you are ready to draw a wire Click pin 8 of U3 to begin the wire D Following the illustration in Figure 1 2 click where you want each vertex of the wire Each click ends a wire segment and starts a new one 4 Click pin 1 of U8A Notice that the wire is now ended where you clicked to place a pin The pointer remains in the shape of a pencil and you are ready to start another wire 5 Wire the rest of the schematic to the bus except for the wires of the right sides of U5 and U6 6 Right click to stop drawing wires Labeling the dataclk wire Label the wire connecting the CLK pin of U3 to the A pin of U8A 1 Double click any segment of the wire to display the Set Set Attribute Value ES Attribute Value dialog box LABEL Type datac1k in the LABEL text box Conca 3 Click OK 1 12 Getting Started Buses must be labeled Examples of legal bus names are DB 0 12 DB 0 12 DB 0 12 DBO DB1 CLK is Set Attribute Value LABEL oB11 12 You can use the Auto Repeat function to place the wires that connect the pins to the bus because the wires will be the same length and fixed distances Drawing and Labeling Buses Draw the bus labeled DB 1 12 Drawing the bus 1 4 Click the Draw Bus button The pointer is now shaped like a pencil as 1t was when you were drawing wires Click where you want to start the bus
118. ate menu Deleting a page Navigate to the page you want to delete 2 From the Navigate menu select Delete Page to display a Delete Page confirmation dialog box 7 Delete current schematic page 3 Click OK to delete the page Cancel 4 64 Creating and Editing Designs File Menu Edit Draw Navigate New Open Close Import Export Save Save As Checkpoint Printing Your Design Printing options allow you to print one or more pages or a selected area of a schematic Printing the current page of the current schematic 1 Click the Print button The page is immediately sent to the current default printer Printing a selected area of the current page 1 Select an area of the schematic See Selecting on page 4 40 2 Click the Print button The selected area is immediately sent to the current default printer Printing selectively 1 From the File menu select Print to display the Print dialog box Current Printer HP Laserjet 45i 45iMes PS on LPT1 Pages Select All Auto fit one schematic page per printer page A Printer Setup Scaling Page Setup User definable zoom factor foo Printer Select Orientation Landscape Portrait Cancel F Ony Fint Selected Area N Select the appropriate pages from the Pages list or click Select All to print all of the pages of the current schematic Printing Your Design 4 65 Selec
119. ate position in mils or mm of the part at its origin in the board layout If units are specified the value is interpreted as inches Interfacing with MicroSim PCBoards 11 21 Table 11 3 Component Location Attributes Attribute Description COMP_Y Y axis coordinate position in mils or mm of the part at its origin in the board layout If units are specified the value is interpreted as inches COMP_ANGLE Orientation of the part specified as an angle in degrees COMP_FIXED If YES it designates the part is immovable COMP_X and COMP_Y must be specified This attribute defaults to NO To specify one of the properties shown in Table 11 3 for a part on the schematic 1 Double click the part to display the Edit Attributes dialog box 2 In the Name text box type the property name such as COMP_X In the Value text box type the property value Click Save Attr Click OK Cross Probing You can select a part or wire in Schematics and highlight the You can also cross probe the corresponding component or trace in the PCBoards layout schematic from MicroSim PCBoards Refer to the Cross Highlighting the component in the layout for a ise a td omponents chapter in your part on the schematic MicroSim PCBoards User s 1 From the Tools menu select Cross Probe Layout in Guide Schematics 2 Click the part with the component you wish to see in the layout 11 22 Preparing Your Design for Board Layout Highlightin
120. aterials reports MicroSim PSpice A D simulation results A 4 simulation simulation i audit output file 1 4 Getting Started Example Drawing a Schematic The following example demonstrates the basic drawing features for drawing a schematic It shows you how to start the schematic editor and begin a new design find out which libraries are configured for Schematics place parts on a schematic connect the part using wires and buses label wires and buses change reference designators and part values move parts wires and text use ports on a schematic place power and ground symbols on a schematic save your design Follow this example to create the circuit shown in Figure 1 2 Example Drawing a Schematic 1 5 ay us OA y OB R1 A 06 Ue ik er ab AAN25 236 Qe y DB 1 12 Figure 1 2 Opto isolated Addressable Serial to parallel Converter Circuit 1 6 Getting Started Schematics For Unix Users Do one of the following e Inthe File Manager double click a schematic sch file e Inthe shelltool type psched lt options gt where lt options gt are any of the options described in the Command Line Options section on this page Starting a New Design Start the schematic editor by double clicking on the Schematics icon in the MicroSim program group An empty schematic pa
121. atic for symbolization follow these guidelines e Place input and output interface ports IF_IN IF_OUT at the inputs and outputs of the schematic Interface ports are mapped to I O pins placed on the left input and right output of the new symbol e Place global ports GLOBAL or BUBBLE to bring out global nets or connections as hidden pins Global ports are mapped to hidden pins placed on the top and bottom of the new symbol An IPIN xxx attribute with a value that is the name of the net that it is connected to is created for each Most of the symbols provided in the Schematics symbol libraries are primitive Note that a symbol for example a flip flop may be primitive for a PCB netlister but hierarchical for PSpice There is no built in limit to the number of levels of nesting allowed in a symbol Nesting of hierarchical symbols or blocks within other hierarchical symbols or blocks is possible 7 10 Creating and Editing Hierarchical Designs File Menu ES Draw Navigate New Open Close Import Export Save Save As Print Print Setup Edit Library Note Avoid modifying the symbol libraries that were shipped with your software Create a new symbol library for the custom symbols you create hidden pin Hidden pins are especially useful for global power and ground on digital parts G_DPWR G_DGND Symbolizing a schematic 1 Open the schematic 2 From the File menu sel
122. ay REFDES U7 T C Value only TEMPLATE X REFDE Name only PART Both name and value MNTYMXDLY 0 Both name and value only if value defined 10_LEVEL 0 None ipin VEE G_ECL_100k_ Display Characteristics Layer attribute Tex y ic Orient horizontal z I Keep relative rotation Hlust fief a Add any attributes to contain custom information for later use b Click OK 6 From the File menu select Save Moving Non Electrical Information Moving text graphics and annotation symbols 1 Select the object annotation movement cursor becomes attached to the 2 Place the pointer on the edge of the object and the Le pointer 3 Drag and place the object at the desired location on the page 4 60 Creating and Editing Designs vigate Menu PEGE View Options Analysis Na a Select Page Page Title Page Number 2 Cancel Creating and Editing Multi sheet Designs A schematic can contain one or more pages As a schematic grows beyond a single page ports are used to establish connectivity Off page ports provide connectivity between pages of the same schematic Global ports provide connectivity across schematic pages to other global ports of the same name anywhere in the schematic hierarchy Off page and global ports are named the same as the nets that they are connected to The Navigate menu allows you to move between pages in multi sheet designs and provides the mean
123. ayer Determines the size of the text of a displayed text item The size is expressed as a percentage of the default size the default size is the font size for the selected layer Sets the horizontal justification for the placement of text items left center or right Sets the vertical justification for placing text items top normal or bottom 5 14 Using the Symbol Editor Pin Name and Number Changing pin name text characteristics 1 Double click the pin name or pin number to display the Change Pin dialog box Pin Name Edit Attributes M Display Name Type noma 7 Drient horizontal 7 Hiust fiet Viust romal z Size ho I Hidden Net Pin Attributes Pin fi ERC dont care If Unconnected Eloat Error IV Modeled Pin Cancel 2 Change any of the text characteristics as shown in Table 5 3 3 Click OK Changing pin number text characteristics 1 Double click the pin name or pin number to display the Change Pin dialog box Click Edit Attributes to display the Attributes dialog box Name PIN Value 26 Del Attr ERC x What to Display gt Value only C Name only Both name and value C Both name and value only if value defined C None Display Characteristics Layer Pin Numbers Orient horizonta y Hiust fer y Viust normal 7 Size fo IV Changeable in schematic I Keep relative rotation OK Cancel Changing
124. bol Wizard refreshes the symbol editor screen display Page 6 11 I p N D p N Un a ri PS A ial v S Symbol Editor Window 5 9 5 10 Using the Symbol Editor Title Bar The symbol editor window title bar displays the name of the symbol library and the symbol currently being edited For example C MSIM LIB PORT SLB GLOBAL When you open a symbol editor window and have not specified a symbol for editing the title bar displays lt new gt lt new gt This indicates you are editing a new symbol in a new library Symbol Editor Window 5 11 Keyboard Table 5 2 lists the function keys you can use instead of menu selections to enable or disable certain functions For those functions that toggle pressing the function key enables the feature and pressing plus the function key disables the feature Table 5 2 Symbol Editor Function Keys Key Action Menu Selection Function keys F2 J F4 F5 J LF6 J and are toggle keys F1 Help Help Pressing the key enables the F2 grid on Options Display Options feature and pressing plus the key disables the feature F4 text stay on grid Options Display Options F5 auto scroll Options Pan amp Zoom F6 stay on grid Options Display Options F8 auto repeat Options Auto Repeat F10 current errors File Current Errors 5 12 Using the Symbol Editor Changing Text Characteristics For any text placed on
125. box 6 43 Pin Type dialog box 6 24 pin types available 6 23 changing 6 24 defining 6 23 selecting a default 6 24 pin to pin spacing 3 29 definition of Glossary 5 Place Pins button 5 9 6 12 Place Text dialog box 6 12 placing bus and part 4 22 connectors 11 3 Index 12 global ports 4 39 7 9 interface ports 7 9 parts 1 8 4 9 ports 1 16 power and ground symbols 1 17 4 26 previously selected part 4 5 repeating 4 19 resistors 1 9 stimulus sources 8 7 symbol 4 9 voltage source 7 21 PLD s updating the schematic 10 3 PLD s CPLD s targeting using PLSyn 10 2 PLSyn targeting PLD s CPLD s 10 2 pointer behavior 4 55 popping 7 15 port definition of Glossary 5 global 4 38 Glossary 2 interface 7 6 7 12 Glossary 3 labeling 1 17 off page 4 38 4 61 Glossary 4 placing 1 16 where used 3 4 Ports and connectors distinctions between 11 3 power and ground symbols 1 17 4 26 power symbols custom 4 27 prerequisite to drawing schematic 1 2 primitive parts 3 3 primitive symbol 7 9 definition of Glossary 5 Print button 3 7 4 64 Print dialog box 4 64 5 21 printing bill of materials report 11 13 design 4 64 options 4 64 schematic 4 64 selected area 4 64 symbol 5 21 programmable logic simulating design from Schematics 10 3 symbols 10 3 targeting parts for 10 2 programmable logic devices See PLD properties changing 4 52 Protel layout format 11 24 pushing 7 15 into b
126. ch package type or group of package types that share the same pin out the physical pin numbers for each pin must be defined The Pin Assignments frame in the Package Definition dialog box shows the pin numbers assigned for each logical pin on the symbol for the active package type Note The pin name must match that used in the symbol If the pin name does not match that used on the symbol or you need to make a change perform the following procedure Editing pin numbers 1 From the Packaging menu select Edit to display the Package Definition dialog box shown on 6 38 In the Package Types list select the package type to be edited Click Edit Pins to display the Pin Assignments dialog box 7410 Pin Assignments Lx Package Types DIP14 Gate Pin Name Pin No O E Delete OK sl Cancel In the list in the lower left of the dialog box click the pin you want to edit The pin name and pin number appear in the boxes directly above the list Make your changes in the Pin Name and Pin No text boxes Click Save Assignment Any changes you make to a pin assignment are not in effect until you select Save Assignment If you make a change to Specifying Part Packaging Information 6 41 a pin and then select another pin from the list without saving the changes are not implemented When you are finished editing pins click OK In the Package Definition dialog box click OK Specifying Information
127. chapter describes how to prepare your design for use with a board layout program and has the following sections Connectors on page 11 3 describes placing connectors to provide the interface between the PCB and the rest of the system This section also describes how to create connector symbols Packaging the Parts in Your Design on page 11 6 describes the process of collecting individual gates into physical packages and reassigning reference designators and gate names to reflect how they are packaged Generating a Bill of Materials Report on page 11 12 describes how to generate a report listing the quantities of each component type used in the design along with corresponding reference designators Swapping Pins on page 11 18 describes how to swap pins on a given gate 11 2 Preparing Your Design for Board Layout Interfacing with MicroSim PCBoards on page 11 19 describes the procedures for using Schematics with MicroSim PCBoards Interfacing to Other Board Layout Products on page 11 24 describes the procedures for using Schematics with the board layout products from other vendors Connectors Connectors provide the interface between a PCB and the rest of a system The distinction between connectors and ports on a schematic is important and is shown in Table 11 1 Off page ports are not physical connectors so you cannot use an off page port as a connector or a connector as an off page port You may use them toget
128. checklist simulation 4 4 circle drawing 6 11 circuit definition of Glossary 2 clipboard copying to 4 45 pasting from 4 45 closing Message Viewer 3 49 schematic editor 4 70 single schematic 4 70 Index 3 symbol editor 5 6 color configuration 3 37 component locations 11 20 components aspects of 5 3 description file 11 15 multi gate 6 41 multiple gate types 6 44 of design 3 3 with more than one symbol 6 44 Configure Tools dialog box 11 24 configured package types list 6 38 configuring application settings 3 38 autosave interval 3 32 colors 3 37 custom libraries 6 48 display 3 34 fonts 3 36 library 3 16 MicroSim Schematics 3 15 msim ini file 3 39 netlist D 1 package types 6 46 page settings 3 24 select recent part list size 3 41 simulation library 8 5 symbol libraries 1 7 3 16 Configuring Package Types dialog box 6 46 connecting inter page signals 4 61 schematic pages 3 4 signals via labels A 8 wire to a bus 4 29 wires to bus 1 12 4 31 connections 3 5 4 30 connectivity implicit 7 13 in multi sheet designs 4 60 OrCAD schematics A 8 orthogonal 4 33 rubberbanding 4 35 rules 4 30 connector definition of Glossary 2 placing 11 3 symbol 11 5 controlling display 3 34 Index 4 conventions mouse iV typographical iv Copy Package Definition dialog box 6 36 Copy Page dialog box 4 61 Copy Part dialog box 4 18 6 5 cop
129. ck ae a 7 13 MnanslatOrs 22 lt S48 Goa GRRE OES SRE Soa ARA Zk 7 13 X Contents Navigating Through Hierarchical Designs 0 7 15 Assigning Instance Specific Part Values oaoa aaa 7 17 Passing Information Between Levels of Hierarchy 7 18 Example Creating a Hierarchical Design 7 20 Drawing the Top Level Schematic 7 20 Wiring the Symbols lt 3 454404 4 Boe 4 Gd See PO Re 7 23 Drawing the Lower Level Schematic 7 24 Chapter 8 Preparing Your Design for Simulation OVERVIEW sd BRS ae ao gu wo Be ad a we Wd oe SH eid Oe eS 8 1 Creating Designs for Simulation and Board Layout 8 3 Specifying Part Attributes 4 06584 04046 884 6285 08809 S404 8 3 Handling Unmodeled Pins o o e e 8 4 Specifying Simulation Model Libraries o o 8 5 Editing Simulation Models from Schematics o oo 8 6 Adding and Defining Stimulus eun sn a e E 8 7 Placing Stimulus Sources o e e 8 7 Using the Stimulus EdItOF ee a Sob ew e a woe a dk 8 7 Serine Up Analyses o a 4 a4 Sse hh ded eo OR SEL EROS Rw He 8 8 Starting the Simulator scce 4 24 5 jee SEA BH a eS Boe eG Se 8 8 Viewing Results aas taae 62 0 4 Oho SORE ASS Ho HE oH 8 9 Viewing Bias Point Results o 00022000 8 9 Viewing Results as You Simulate o o 8 9 Using Markers o o g 6 BGG SRR SE
130. ck the New File button on the toolbar 2 You are prompted to name the library when you save the first symbol Any symbol or package definition you create will be saved inthe new library Starting the Symbol Editor 5 5 A quick way to edit a symbol for a part used on a schematic 1 Click the part on the schematic to select it 2 Click the Edit Symbol button on the toolbar The symbol editor is started the library containing the symbol is loaded and the symbol is displayed for editing La 5 6 Using the Symbol Editor Window Menu Cascade Tile Horizontal Tile Vertical Arrange Icons v 1 Schematic p 1 2 lt new gt lt new gt File Menu ES Draw Navigate View New Open Saving your Changes To save newly created symbols or changes to existing symbols 1 Click the File Save button on the toolbar If the library is not configured for use in the schematic editor you will be asked if you want to configure the library Answer YES to make the symbols in the library available for use in Schematics If the library is already configured any schematics using symbols you have changed will be updated to use the new symbol Returning to the Schematic Editor To return to the schematic editor and keep the symbol editor window open for additional symbol editing do one of the following e minimize the symbol editor window e click in the schematic editor window e select the schematic edito
131. ckage class priorities see the procedure in the following section If you want to specify the number of the first reference designator to be assigned other than the default value of 1 type a value in the Starting Designator text box If you want to specify the amount to add to the starting designator between pages of the schematic type a value in the Page Increment text box If you want to specify the amount to add to the starting designator between levels of hierarchy type a value in the Level Increment text box Click OK Tools Menu EZY Markers Window Help Note When you add parts to a design that has already been sent to layout be sure to select the Only Unpackaged option in the Package dialog box This will create the fewest changes to the netlist 11 10 Preparing Your Design for Board Layout For details on adding package types and classes see Configuring Package Types on page 6 46 Tools Menu EZY Markers Window Help Setup Priorities Setting Package Class Priorities Priorities can be set for the packager to use in determining which package type to assign when a part is available in more than one type For example you could specify that a DIP package type be used If the part is not available in DIP then it could assign SMT and so forth This is done by grouping commonly used package types into classes For example all sizes of DIP packages such as DIP8 and DIP16 belong to the DIP class
132. cs and which initialization file to use other than the installed default initialization file msim ini e specifies the use of a different text editor 3 16 Using the Schematic Editor A library name must be in the library search list to be available for placing its symbols Configuring Symbol Libraries There are two major elements that work together in Schematics that let you place symbols into your design e symbol libraries e library search list Symbol libraries are located in library directories The library search list is in the Part Browser and the Editor Configuration dialog box under the Options menu It is important to remember that libraries and the search list have two distinct functions You can create a symbol library but if the library name is not in the library search list it is not available to the design for placing symbols Conversely you can inadvertently create an error condition by having a library name in the search list for a library that doesn t exist Configuring a symbol library is adding a library name to the library search list Note When adding a symbol library to the library search list placement in the list is important If more than one library contains the same symbol name Schematics uses only the first one it encounters You must ensure the library actually exists in the location specified during the configuration procedure Configuring Schematics 3 17 Types of Libraries Schemati
133. cs properties through Display Preferences 1 From the Options menu select Display Preferences to display the Display Preferences dialog box shown on 4 53 From the Display Layers list select the Annotation Graphics layer Click the Graphics tab General Graphics Text l Coor E Width X Style w EA Select the appropriate properties Click Apply to apply the change immediately and keep the dialog box open for further changes or click OK to apply the changes and close the dialog box Adding Non Electrical Information 4 57 Importing Bitmaps and Metafiles You can import bitmap bmp dib Windows metafiles wmf or enhanced metafiles emf onto the schematic Importing a graphic 1 5 From the Draw menu select Insert Picture to display the Open dialog box Insert a Picture 71x Look in a lib ex ee File name m Files of type Bitmaps bmp dib Cancel Select the file type Bitmaps or Metafiles Select a file from the window or type the path of the file location in the File Name text box For example c graphics msim bmp where c is your local drive Click Open and a rectangle the size of the graphic will appear attached to the pointer Click to place it Resizing an imported graphic 1 2 Select the graphic to display its corner handles Drag one of the handles to resize the graphic to the appropriate size The graphic
134. cs recognizes two types of libraries This library Is available global to all schematic designs They are listed in the msim ini file and are automatically loaded into the library search list for every design Global libraries appear in the library search list with an asterisk preceding the library name local to designs within which they are saved Schematics always places local library names at the top of the library search list Local libraries are always searched first Default Library Directory Note To maintain the integrity of your default symbols we recommend making a copy of the default symbol libraries If you use the symbol editor to make However if you prefer you can changes to a default symbol it will overwrite the default symbol if you save using the default file name Also if you e remove library names from the search list without deleting import symbol files into the Schematics includes a default library directory where all the symbol libraries s1b you selected during installation reside It is not required to configure these libraries They are already configured in the search list as global libraries e change the order in which libraries appear in the search list thereby changing the order in which they are searched the libraries default library and an addnewlibraries imported file has the same o name as the default file the e delete libraries imported file will overwrite the e
135. ct Draw Text Box to change the pointer to a pencil shape 2 Click the pointer at a location on the schematic and do the following a Move the pointer down and to the right b Click to set the lower right corner of the text box 3 Type the text Adding Non Electrical Information 4 51 Resizing the text box 1 Select the text box to display its handles 2 Click one of the handles and drag to resize the text box Editing Text 1 Click inside the text box to modify or add text Single Line Text Editing With the single line text option you can continuously type text on one line This is a quick way to enter text onto a schematic and is especially useful if the amount of text is minimal In the schematic editor once the text has been placed it may be edited and the text box may be resized Adding a single line of text 1 From the Draw menu select Text to display the Add Text dialog box Add Text Text Text Captior Cancel Type the text in the text box 3 Click OK An outline box follows the pointer that indicates the outline of the text string 4 Move the outline to the desired location and click to place the text The outline box remains on the screen You can click to place the same text string in several locations 5 To stop placing the text string do one of the following e Double click to place the last instance of the text e Right click to stop placing the text string without placing an additio
136. ctangle Move the pointer to the desired location and click to place the block symbol Right click to stop placing blocks Note One of two Part Browser dialog boxes may appear the Part Browser Advanced and the Part Browser Basic The advanced browser contains many features that you don t need to use for this example If the Part Browser Advanced dialog box appears click lt lt Basic to display the Part Browser Basic dialog box 7 22 Creating and Editing Hierarchical Designs 5 Double click the HB1 reference designator to display the 6 7 Edit Reference Designator dialog box Edit Reference Designator ix Package Reference Designator cmosiny Gate Py Package Type Poy Footprint Cancel Enter CMOSINV in the text box This changes the value of the REFDES attribute from HB1 to CMOSINV Click OK Drawing the output load resistor 1 a A W N 6 Click the Get New Part button to display the Part Browser dialog box see 7 21 Type R in the Part field Click Place amp Close Press Ctrl R to rotate the resistor symbol Move the resistor symbol to the desired location Click to place the symbol Right click to stop placing parts Placing the analog ground symbols 1 Click the Get New Part button to display the Part Browser dialog box see 7 21 Type AGND in the Part field Click Place amp Close You can place the two grounds so that they connect to the pow
137. d that the aliased device will share the same graphics pins and attributes as the primary symbol When you place it on the schematic however it is treated as a separate part type The name displayed on the schematic is that of the alias Each alias requires its own packaging information Adding an alias for a symbol 1 From the Part menu select Definition to display the The PART attribute you define Definition dialog box on a symbol will have its value filled in when you place it on the schematic The name that you call it up with will get filled in as the PART attribute s value Description DC Part Name Alias list ff Type component 7 Po AKO Name tis T Do not display in Part Browser Cancel Add petete 2 Type the name of the alias in the Alias list text box 3 Click Add 4 Click OK 6 34 Creating and Editing Symbols Specifying Part Packaging Information If you are going to use a symbol for PCB layout you will need to specify package or device information Package information consists of e the number of gates per package e alist of package types footprints where the device is available e one or more pin assignment lists e functionally equivalent pins that can be swapped in layout Package information is used by Schematics to package together gates and to generate layout netlists It is also used by MicroSim PCBoards Pin Assignment Lists A pin assignment list is a list of physical p
138. ditor Schematics is shipped with mapping files containing defaults and sample entries Mapping files exist for each of the supported layout formats e lt layout format gt xmp Contains rules for creating entries in the parts list section of the netlist If the part names used in Schematics are different than the names used in the layout package you can specify the substitution to be done e lt layout format gt xnt Contains name mappings for nets For example in Schematics the default power net on some digital parts is named G_DPWR while in most layout systems it is 12V e lt layout format gt xpk Contains name mappings for package types For example in Schematics a package type is called TO33 and in the layout editor it is TO 33 11 26 Preparing Your Design for Board Layout Common Syntax Each file xmp xnt and xpk consists of a number of lines Empty lines and those starting with the character are ignored Otherwise a line consists of one or more comma separated identifiers followed by either an AKO specification or a replacement string An AKO A Kind Of specifier consists of the keyword AKO followed by an identifier Schematics looks up AKO definitions until it finds a definition that is not an AKO then uses this new definition circular AKO chains are not allowed The replacement string is processed further by Schematics and then becomes an entry for the part in the Partlist section of the lay
139. e A drawing consisting of the following components one or more pages a set of symbols representing local part definitions or parts in a library file and text When drawing or editing a schematic or symbol the area identified and enclosed by a region of interest ROD box for the purpose of performing some operation on the objects within the area A special symbol used to specify initial node voltages during simulation The use of a mathematical model to represent the physical operation of a circuit design Symbols placed on a schematic to identify digital and analog voltage and signal sources used during simulation Consists of the graphical representation of a logical or physical electronic part on the schematic A symbol may have one or more associated attributes Glossary 6 symbol definition symbolize translator view viewpoint voltage viewpoint wire Consists of the data from which the netlist is generated A symbol or part definition consists of the following the part name and any aliases its attributes primitive definition also called the circuit definition and pin definitions Creating a symbol to represent a schematic 1 Another name for a netlister 2 The process of reading a schematic created by another design program and converting it to a Schematics file A mechanism for allowing hierarchical symbols to have more than one underlying representation for example defining a flip flop to
140. e AGND EGND 5V 5V BUBBLE GND_ANALOG GND_EARTH Placing Power and Ground Symbols In Schematics power and ground symbols are a type of global port symbol The label on the port defines the name of the power supply Placing Power and Ground Symbols Placing a symbol on the schematic 1 From the Draw menu select the Get New Part button see Finding Parts on page 4 4 to select a port symbol from the part browser 2 Move the outline pointer to where you want the part located and click To place several instances point and click at each additional location Stopping part placement To stop placing the symbol do one of the following e Double click to place the last instance of the symbol e Right click to stop placing the symbol without placing an additional symbol The outline changes back to a pointer Placing Power and Ground Symbols Creating Custom Power and Ground Symbols Because power and ground symbols are just like any other symbols you can use the symbol editor to create your own custom power and ground symbols See Drawing Symbol Graphics on page 6 10 4 27 4 28 Creating and Editing Designs Using Wires and Buses Parts and ports contain one or more pins to which connections can be made Electrical connections are formed by joining pins of parts and ports with wires and buses A junction dot appears where three items are joined Drawing and Labeling Wires Drawing a wir
141. e R 1 Click the Draw Wire button to change the pointer to a pencil shape Click to start the wire Click at each vertex of the wire 4 Click a pin another wire or a bus to end the wire or double click to end at any point If you end the wire on a pin another wire or a bus and do amp not double click draw wire mode remains active which allows you to start and draw additional wires 5 To stop drawing the wire do one of the following e Double click to place the last segment of the wire e Right click to stop drawing the wire without drawing an additional segment Adding a wire segment The outline changes back to a pointer exisiin If a wire segment meets the end of another wire segment they wir ER become part of the same wire without a junction being created This principle also applies to bus segments addition k one wire nr N ie junction If a wire segment is added so its end point intersects another wire segment at a point other than its end points a junction is created and the original wire is split into two segments All three segments become part of the same wire You can place a label on selected wires bus segments or ports Wire and bus segments may have multiple labels Labeling a wire You can assign labels to wires for clarity Labels are not required except on wires that are connected to buses 1 Double click the wire segment that you want to label which will display the Set Attribute V
142. e symbol a Click once to start drawing b Makea horizontal line 6 grid dots long Do not count the starting grid dot c Click once to anchor the end move the cursor up 6 grid dots and click to anchor the line midpoint d Continue drawing and close the triangle by double clicking at the starting point e Draw a line at a 45 degree angle across the right angle of the symbol already created to denote the cathode Example Creating Symbols from Scratch 6 53 4 Place three copies of this diode a Drag the mouse to select the area that includes the graphics Release the mouse to turn the lines red If they do not turn red reselect the area or lt Shift click the unselected items to add them to the selected group b From the Edit menu select Copy Cc From the Edit menu select Paste Place one copy nearby another copy will remain attached to the cursor e Before placing the next two copies rotate the graphics by pressing Ctri R There are now four diode symbols two pointing to the upper right and two pointing to the lower right 5 From the Options menu select Display Options and reset the grid to 00 10 Verify that Stay on Grid and Snap to Grid are still enabled 6 From the Graphics menu select Draw Box to start the box drawing mode a Click once approximately one grid square southeast of the small origin box b Drag to the lower right corner position c When you have the lower right co
143. e Page Settings dialog box In the Editor Configuration dialog box click OK Configuring Schematics 3 29 Pin to Pin Spacing You can scale symbols so they will appear larger or smaller on the schematic You do this by changing the pin to pin spacing for a given page size Changing the pin to pin spacing 1 From the Options menu select Editor Configuration to display the Editor Configuration dialog box shown on 3 26 2 Click Page Settings to display the Page Settings dialog box Page Settings shown on 3 28 In the Pin to Pin Spacing text box type a new value Click OK Changing Grid and Gravity The grid and gravity functions of Schematics ease your drawing tasks and can help make your schematic more precise Grid On When Grid On is enabled the grid is displayed in the drawing area of the schematic editor window Enabling or disabling the grid display m Options 1 From the Options menu select Display Options Gidti IM Rubberband M Snap to Grid Y Orthogonal 2 Select or clear the Grid On check box to enable or disable M Snapto Pin I CursorX and Y the grid display M Stay orGrid rM Grid Spacing 3 Click OK Grid Size 00 10 in m Text Grid M Stay on Grid Grid Size 00 02 in r Snap to Pin Gravity 00 01 in Cancel 3 30 Using the Schematic Editor Display Options m Optio M Rubberband M Snap to Grid Y Orthogonal M SnaptoPin IM CursorX
144. e a a a we a a a a 3 4 ADUE aa ae ores as A a Oe Se Lae A SOG OS Go 3 4 ANNOUONS 6 4 4 4 5a 4 RoR A ERS SE Sod eG Sold a ae Bo 3 4 COMMECHONS wa lt lt jh Aw oe bb bee HAO OEE HE OSS oA 3 5 Main Window 2 8 4 Hb Abe eR OH pu aae k Ee OR 3 6 Menus sor a sides deans gai a Oe g wks Bae a Gk Ge Ske 3 6 Toolbars osos BERG ee EER See CREE gE A 3 7 Standard SCheMatics s dico Badd bh bas DES a as ws 3 7 Drawing ss 24 ba oe Gee Haw Oe A Oe oR Oe 3 9 Simulation s s enes ade 3 eae hoe a Ok eee wa eee Oe 3 10 Annotation Graphics docs amp oO OO SG Sk ORE Oe SE 3 12 Status Bar ana Sed a doo PR a Sod 4 De Ree ae SB 3 13 Refreshing the Screen ss asa 4 bo PS 4RABASS 4 AAD ORS 3 13 Keyboatd s ses 6 6 3 2 8 4 owe ee OE He 3 14 Configuring Schematics s ss ama ke bo Soe poke ba a ee ke we a 3 15 Configuring Symbol Libraries o o 3 16 Types O IIDTArES s sorce ab 4 Bis Oe He aoe YEE a ee EH 3 17 Default Library Directory oo o 3 17 User Defined Symbol Libraries s cos oce rc ee 3 18 Removing Library Names o e 3 20 Correcting Library Names o o e 3 20 Changing the Search Order o 3 21 Changing the Search Path o o 3 22 Chaneing Pace Size o ceca ed eS a A 3 23 Changing Pace Seings eaea a eS A eA Re OO EES 3 24 Border Style 2 2 a1 4 op 3 8 e BBs Gee ir da 3 24 Drawing Area p mms po BB ORO Re Dawe oe eS 3 28 Pin
145. e of the selected library displays in the Library Name text box In the Library Name text box type a new name for the library Do not type a file name extension the file name extension is appended automatically Click Change Click OK to exit the Library Setting dialog box In the Editor Configuration dialog box click OK Changing the Search Order The way that Schematics searches libraries for a symbol follows the order in which the libraries are configured in the list You can change the position of a library in the list Changing the position of the library in the list 1 From the Options menu click Editor Configuration to display the Editor Configuration dialog box shown on 3 18 Click Library Settings to display the Library Settings dialog box shown on 3 19 In the list of libraries select the library name that you want to move The name of the selected library displays in the Library Name text box Click Delete In the list of libraries select the name above which the repositioned name will be inserted In the Library Name text box type the name of the library you want to reposition Do not type a file name extension the file name extension is appended automatically If the library is a symbol library select the Symbol check box If the library has an associated package library select the Package check box Click Add for a global library or click Add Local for a local library Configuri
146. e on Selected Net s button 3 10 Simulation toolbar 3 10 simulation attaching markers 11 3 attribute 8 3 checklist 4 4 definition of Glossary 5 include information A 4 models 4 4 5 4 8 4 F 2 of programmable logic design 10 3 parts designated for E 4 Simulation button 3 10 simulation library configuring 8 5 Index 14 simulation model defined 8 5 editing 8 6 library 8 5 single line text editing 4 53 snap to grid enabling or disabling 5 17 snap to pin 3 31 4 34 5 17 source current stimulus 8 7 digital stimulus 8 7 voltage stimulus 8 7 spacing pin to pin 3 29 specifying multi gate component information 6 41 par packaging information 6 34 part attributes 8 3 physical pin numbers 6 40 pin types 6 23 text grid size 5 19 splitting bus 4 31 Standard Schematics toolbar 3 7 starting new design 1 6 schematic editor 4 3 simulator 8 8 symbol editor 4 58 5 5 symbol editor automatically 5 6 starting Schematics Motif 1 6 status bar 3 13 stay on grid 3 30 5 16 with snap to grid enabled 4 34 5 17 stimulus adding 8 7 defining 8 7 definition of Glossary 5 editor 8 7 source 4 4 swapping pins 11 18 symbol accessing 6 20 annotation 3 4 as element of a component 5 3 base 6 7 connector 11 5 converting from block 7 11 copying 6 5 creating 1 2 6 3 default attribute 4 18 definition of Glossary 5 Glossary 6 editing 1 2 4 18 6 20 elements of 6 10 expor
147. ect Symbolize to display the Save As dialog box Type the name of the symbol Click OK A file selection dialog box prompts for a symbol library to save the symbol in 5 Select a library 6 Click OK When you symbolize a schematic the resulting symbol is hierarchical that is it will have a schematic associated with it so you can push into the symbol and view that schematic After you have symbolized your schematic you need to make the symbols in your new symbol library available to Schematics Creating and Editing Hierarchical Symbols 7 11 Converting Hierarchical Blocks to Symbols When you finish editing a hierarchical block you have the option of turning the block into a symbol By making the block a symbol you make it available for use in other schematics Converting a block to a symbol 1 Select the block 2 From the Edit menu select Convert Block to display the Save As dialog box 3 Type a name for the symbol 4 Click OK to display the Open dialog box 5 Select a library 6 Click OK Schematics creates a rectangular symbol to represent the block One pin is placed on the new symbol for each wire or bus that was connected to the block The width of the block shrinks one unit on each side to accommodate symbol pins without requiring rewiring Edit Menu Draw Navigate View Undo Ctrl Z Cut Ctrlex Copy Ctrl C Delete DEL Select All Attributes Text Properties Views Convert Block
148. ect the element 2 Press Ctrl R to rotate it 90 counter clockwise Rotating an area of the drawing 1 Drag the pointer to select and outline the area to be rotated 2 Press Ctrl R to rotate the area The selected area rotates 90 counter clockwise about the center point of the selected area Flipping Elements Flipping an element before placing it on the drawing 1 Press Ctr F to flip the element while still in the drag mode Drawing Symbol Graphics 6 17 Rotating a Drawing Element kO Default O h Rotated once Flipping a Drawing Element kO Default Sa Flipped once 6 18 Creating and Editing Symbols Flipping an already placed element 1 Select the element 2 Press Ctrl F to flip it Flipping an area of the drawing 1 Drag the mouse to select and outline the area to be flipped 2 Press Ctrl F to flip the area about its vertical axis Drawing Symbol Graphics 6 19 Moving Moving an object 1 Select an object or group of objects 2 Place the pointer on the edge of the object or selected area and the annotation movement cursor becomes attached to I the pointer 3 Drag and place the object at the desired location on the page Resizing Objects that have already been drawn can be resized by using the appropriate handles Resizing an object 1 Select the object that you want to resize 2 Click one of the handles and drag to resize the object An arro
149. ectivity when moving parts wires or buses enable the rubberbanding option Moving resistor R1 up one grid 1 Click the resistor to select it 2 Drag the resistor up one grid 3 Place the resistor at the new location Part values reference designators and other text can be moved in the same way Moving the value of R10 1 Click the 100k value of the resistor The box outline around the value indicates that it is selected The box outline around the resistor shows that the resistor is the owner of the selected value 2 Drag the value of the resistor to a new location The box representing the 100k value follows as you move the pointer For information on how to enable the rubberbanding option see Rubberbanding on page 4 35 The color of the selected resistor is the color specified for the Selection display layer in the Display Preferences dialog box see Configuring Colors on page 3 37 1 16 Getting Started sa Libraries Placing Ports Ports in Schematics identify signals that are inputs or outputs to a schematic Place ports in the same way that you place other parts Placing the port 1 2 From the Draw menu select Get New Part to display the Part Browser dialog box shown on 1 8 Click Libraries to display the Library Browser dialog box Part Name favo BAL Description Global connector Library PLD_TOS slb POLYFET sib EXTERNAL_OUT EXTERNAL_BI GND_ANA
150. ecutively 1 Hold down lt gt Shift 2 Click the first desired layer in the list and the last Every layer in between will be selected To select more than one layer non consecutively 1 Hold down Ctr 2 Click each desired layer 3 36 Using the Schematic Editor Changing Fonts If you are rotating text objects To change the default fonts Schematics uses to display and print use TrueType fonts to prevent text use the Display Preferences dialog box the display from becoming distorted Selecting a font 1 From the Options menu select Display Preferences to Options Menu display the Display Preferences dialog box ES Analysis Tools Ma Display Options Page Size Display Preferences x Auto Repeat Display Layers Bagel Graphics Text Auto Naming Annotation Graphics Editor Configuration Font Modem Size 0 12 in 2 048 rani Markers and Viewpoints p Frame Page Boundary Color None I Part Names Pin Names 2 Pin Numbers Width Pins PLSyn Style Ports Relies Fit None Selection Simulation Currents Madoz Simulation Voltages xj X Stirnas a ao 2 Select one or more layers from the Display Layers list 3 Click the Text tab 4 Click Browse to display the Font dialog box Font Font Size oe a JE a Arial Black E Cancel H Arial Narrow 10 T Arial Rounded MT Bex 11 x Sample AaBbYyZz Controll
151. ed To learn how to select single and multiple objects as well as objects within a given area see Selecting on page 4 40 Cutting Cut deletes the selected object or group of objects from the schematic and copies it to the clipboard for use with the Paste function The clipboard retains only the object last cut Cutting a selected object 1 Select an object to cut 2 From the Edit menu select Cut Copying The Copy function makes a copy of the selected object for pasting The selected object remains on the schematic and a copy is placed to the clipboard Copying a selected object 1 Select the object to copy 2 From the Edit menu select Copy Pasting Paste places one or more copies of the last object stored in the buffer from a Cut or Copy operation onto the schematic Shortcut press Ctrl x Shortcut press Ctrl C 4 44 Creating and Editing Designs Shortcut press Ctrl V With Auto Repeat enabled see Repeating Part Placements on page 4 19 press to place repeated copies of items from the buffer Shortcut press Ctrl Z for Undo and Ctri Y for Redo Pasting an object 1 From the Edit menu select Paste to change the pointer to the shape of the object last cut or copied 2 Click to place the object at the current pointer location Continue moving the pointer to various locations and clicking to place additional copies of the object Right click to stop pasting Deleting D
152. een commands A variety of articles that show you how a particular task can be accomplished using MicroSim s products and examples that demonstrate a new or different approach to solving an engineering problem A complete list of the analog and digital parts in the model and symbol libraries Reference information for MicroSim PCBoards such as file name extensions padstack naming conventions and standards footprint naming conventions the netlist file format the layout file format and library expansion and compression utilities Information on the integrated interface to Cooper amp Chyan Technology s CCT SPECCTRA autorouter in MicroSim PCBoards Online Help Selecting Search for Help On from the Help menu brings up an extensive online Help system The online Help includes e step by step instructions on how to use Schematics features e reference information about Schematics e technical support information If you are not familiar with the Windows NT or 95 Help System select How to Use Help from the Help menu What s New for Release 8 vii What s New for Release 8 Design Journal is a very powerful analysis and tracking tool When creating a schematic design you can make a checkpoint of the schematic which is a copy of the schematic you are working on in its current stage of development All files even non EDA files associated with your design can be automatically saved You can then explore alternative
153. elete removes an object A deleted object cannot be copied or pasted Deleting a selected object 1 Select an object to delete 2 Press Delete The object is placed in the recycle bin and can only be recovered with the undo function see Undo Redo on page 4 44 Undo Redo Undo reverses changes made such as placing parts changing attributes moving objects or drawing wires and buses Redo will re do what was just undone There is no limit to how many steps can be undone or redone However Undo Redo information is only stored for changes to the schematic since the last time the file was saved To undo redo what was just done 1 From the Edit menu select Undo or Redo Note Undo Redo does not apply to operations that do not change the page content For example panning and zooming editing a library or a symbol creating a netlist or adding creating or copying a page Selecting and Moving Objects and Attributes 4 45 Copying to the Clipboard The Copy to Clipboard function copies objects within a selection rectangle to the Microsoft Windows Clipboard for use in other Windows programs Electrical or connectivity information is not copied to the clipboard This function is useful if you want to make a copy of your schematic to include in another type of file such as a word processor file If the grid is enabled the grid dots are copied to the clipboard along with the schematic If you don t want the grid dots copied
154. em defined attributes Note You cannot change the display of non changeable attributes Adding Attributes Adding a new attribute 1 Double click the part to display the Attribute Editing dialog box see 4 12 Double click in the Name text box and type the new attribute name Press Tab and type the new attribute value in the Value text box Click Save Attr Click OK The new attribute and its value apply only to the part instance you are editing on the current schematic The attribute and value are saved only with the schematic they are not saved in the symbol library Deleting Attributes Deleting an attribute 1 Double click the part to display the Attribute Editing dialog box see 4 12 Select the attribute to delete Click Delete Click OK Changing the Display of Attributes You can change how specific attributes appear on the schematic Displaying attributes 1 Double click the part to display the Attribute Editing dialog box see 4 12 2 Select the attribute whose display you want to enable or disable Click Change Display to display the Change Attribute dialog box Change Attribute Name VALUE Value fi k What to Display Value only Name only Both name and value C Both name and value only if value defined None Display Characteristics Orient horizontal Hjust ier Layer Atribute Text z Vjust roma gt Size 100 Ch c r ree are raton o
155. ematic editor closing 4 70 exporting B 3 importing graphics 4 57 returning 5 6 simulating a Programmable Logic Design 10 3 using 3 1 Schematics Export dialog box B 3 SCICARDS layout format 11 24 search criteria 4 42 searching for parts 4 6 4 41 for schematic in hierarchy 7 16 Select Page dialog box 4 62 Select Part button 3 9 7 21 select recent part list size 3 41 selecting area of schematic 4 40 area of symbol drawing 6 14 area of view 3 42 attribute of object 4 40 auto repeat 4 19 default pin types 6 24 Index 13 element of drawing 6 14 fonts 3 36 library 4 8 multiple elements 6 14 multiple objects 4 40 objects on schematic 4 40 part by description 4 7 part by name 4 5 part for editing 6 20 part from symbol library 4 8 parts 1 8 selection area definition of Glossary 5 selection rectangle 4 40 Set Attribute Level dialog box 7 18 Set Attribute Value dialog box 1 11 4 29 Set Up Block dialog box 7 5 7 24 setpoint definition of Glossary 5 setting autosave interval 3 32 border style 3 24 default properties 3 34 outline border 3 24 package class priorities 11 10 scale factor 3 43 zoned border 3 24 zoom parameters 3 43 Setup Package Class Priorities dialog box 11 10 shapes filling 6 15 Shared Pin Assignments dialog box 6 42 shortcuts function keys 3 14 5 11 toolbar buttons 3 7 Show Hide Currents on Selected Part s button 3 10 Show Hide Voltag
156. emselves are created and maintained with the MicroSim PCBoards PCB layout editor Refer to the Creating Footprints using the Footprint Editor chapter in the MicroSim PCBoards User s Guide Simulation Models If a component can be simulated it will have an associated simulation model The MODEL attribute on a symbol defines the name of the simulation model Simulation models are stored in model libraries lib You can create new simulation models with Parts or with a text editor Refer to the Creating Models chapter in your PSpice user s guide Starting the Symbol Editor Starting the symbol editor In the schematic editor click the Edit Symbol button to create a new symbol editor document window if one does not already exist If you already have a symbol editor window open you will be prompted to save any unsaved changes to the active symbol You can only have one symbol editor window open at a time When you save the symbol library any open schematics are updated with the changes made in the symbol editor Loading a Library for Editing To edit or create symbols or package definitions in an existing library you must first load the library for editing You can also create a new library to contain the symbols or package definitions that you create Opening an existing library 1 Click the Open File button on the toolbar 2 Type the name of the library in the Open dialog box 3 Click OK Creating a new library 1 Cli
157. encil shape Click the location of the center of the circle Move outward from the center of the circle A dotted circle outline follows the pointer Click when the diameter reaches the size you want Polyline A polyline is one object regardless of the number of vertices it contains It can be manipulated using editing functions such as move cut copy and delete A polyline may also be resized by clicking on any of its handles and stretching it to a new size Drawing a polyline 1 Click the Draw Polyline button to change the pointer to a pencil shape Click to establish the beginning point of the polyline As you move the pointer a dotted line outlines the shape Click to place as many vertices as needed Drawing Symbol Graphics 6 11 6 12 Creating and Editing Symbols 4 Double click to establish the end point of the polyline or When the pointer is over a right click at any point to stop drawing handle it will change shape to indicate the object may be Adding arrowheads to polylines resized see 6 19 1 Select one or more polylines iF yeu deside yau doni wantio From the Edit menu select Graphics Properties apply the changes you have 3 Select the appropriate arrowhead properties made click the Restore Defaults button to restore the settings 4 Click OK selected in the Display Preferences dialog box The Pins Restore Defaults button works at any time before closing the dialog box or after re ent
158. enter point the schematic is panned until the selected point is in the center of the window Panning to a new center 1 From the View menu select Pan New Center 2 Move the pointer to the desired window center and click Zooming and Panning in Schematics 3 45 Automatic Panning If Auto Pan is enabled the pointer turns to a solid black arrow when you move it to the edge of the window If you leave the arrow at the edge of the window for a few moments the view pans in the direction of the arrow You can pan up down left and right using this method Enabling Automatic Panning 1 From the Options menu select Pan amp Zoom to display the Pan amp Zoom dialog box Pan amp Zoom Lx m Zoom Scale Factor fizo e is x Cancel Auto Pan M Enable Hot Zone Size nO Sensitivity hoo ms Pan Coarse Delta 75 10 Fine Delta 2 In the Auto Pan frame select the Enable check box 3 Click OK Setting hot zone size The Hot Zone Size determines the width of the zone where the pointer has to rest to trigger the Auto Pan function 1 From the Options menu click Pan amp Zoom to display the Pan amp Zoom dialog box 2 In the Hot Zone Size text box type a value Values must be in the range from 1 to 10 If the value is set to 1 default value the hot zone is 1 of the dimensions of the screen 3 Click OK lja Options Menu ES Analysis Tools Ma Display Options Page Size
159. er source and the load resistor This negates having to draw wires between the symbols Example Creating a Hierarchical Design 7 23 4 Move the ground symbol to the desired locations Click to place each symbol 5 Right click to stop placing parts Wiring the Symbols Now that you have placed all of the symbols wire the symbols to look like the schematic shown in Figure 7 1 1 Click the Draw Wire button to change the pointer to a pencil in 2 Click the top of V1 Click at the location of the wire vertex where it turns from the vertical to the horizontal Click the left side of the CMOS block The wire is complete when it shows connection on both ends 3 Repeat step 2 to connect a wire from the right side of the CMOS block to the top of the load resistor 4 Right click to stop wire drawing Changing the names of the pins on the block 1 Double click the pin labeled P1 to display the Change Pin dialog box Pin Name IN Edit Attributes IV Display Name Type Pin Orient horizontal ERC input Pin Attributes Hiust iet Vjust bottom fee Float UniqueNet Size foo IV Modeled Pin Te Hidden ne Cancel Type IN in the Pin Name text box Click OK Double click the pin labeled P2 to display the Change Pin dialog box 7 24 Creating and Editing Hierarchical Designs 5 Type OUT in the Pin Name text box 6 Click OK Saving your work as a top level schematic 1 Click the
160. er the name of the component description file caf to be used 4 Choose a Print Output format Choose Text to format the Bill of Materials report in ASCII format with one entry per component type 5 Click OK Generating a Bill of Materials Report 11 15 User Defined Component Information You can display user specific component information such as costs and in house part numbers in the Bill of Materials report The Bill of Materials report will take a component description file as input The component description file cd extension is a user created and maintained text file that contains component information such as cost supplier name and in house order numbers To facilitate extraction of this information from an external component database each file entry must be in comma separated format without spaces as follows lt component name gt lt footprint name gt lt manufacturing ID gt lt attribute name gt lt attribute value gt When you specify more than one user defined property for a given component type you must give each entry identical lt component name gt lt footprint name gt and lt manufacturing D gt values For example two entries for the LM124 component might appear as LM124 DIP14 LM124J ND COST 4 05 LM124 DIP14 LM124J ND SUPPLIER National Each Schematics software installation is shipped with a user cdf file that you can edit to create a custom component descripti
161. er the plus sign in the line of text or the More Info button to display the Additional Info dialog box Schematics Additional Info Lx 160 170 p 2 C msim test decodsub sch 2 Click OK to dismiss the dialog box Closing the Message Viewer To close the Message Viewer do one of the following e From the File menu select Exit e In the upper right corner of the window click the Close button Using the Message Viewer 3 49 Another way to view additional information 1 Right click the message line to display a menu 2 Click Additional Info to display the Additional Info dialog box File Menu AG Edit View Tools Y Open Print Ctrl O Ctrl P Creating and Editing Designs Overview This chapter contains the step by step procedures for creating editing and printing a schematic which includes Starting the Schematic Editor on page 4 3 describes how to start the schematic editor and how to open a new or existing file Finding Parts on page 4 4 describes how to find parts by name or description and by searching the symbol libraries Placing and Editing Parts on page 4 9 describes the detailed steps for placing parts changing the orientation of parts prior to placing them editing part attributes placing multiple instances of a part and automatically assigning reference designators Placing Power and Ground Symbols on page 4 26 describes how to place and edit power and gro
162. ering it Adding pins to a symbol 1 Click the Place Pins button to change the pointer to a pin outline 2 Move the pin outline to the desired location and click to A pi ni1 place the pin A small x appears on one end marking the connectivity F point of the pin Click at each location to place additional pins Do one of the following Note When placing pins the e Double click to place the last pin pin type defaults to the type l that was last placed or to the Right click to stop placing pins without placing an type last specified additional pin The procedures for defining and editing pins begin on 6 23 Text Adding text AR 1 Click the Draw Text button to display the Add Text dialog Ke box Text Text Captior Cancel Type the text in the text box Click OK An outline box follows the pointer that indicates the outline of the text string 4 Move the outline to the desired location and click to place the text The outline box remains on the screen You can click to place the same text string in several locations 5 To stop placing the text string do one of the following e Double click to place the last instance of the text e Right click to stop placing the text string without placing an additional one Editing a text string or changing text characteristics 1 Double click the text string to display the Change Text dialog box 2 Make the desired changes to the text and its charac
163. es of the one instance of this part on the current schematic To change display characteristics for the attributes of a part for every instance placed on every schematic you have to change the global characteristics of the symbol See Editing the Default Attributes of a Symbol on page 4 18 Table 4 1 Attribute Text Characteristics Characteristic Explanation Orient Enables you to position the text horizontally vertically upside down or down in relation to the defining point of the text string Layer Specifies a text display level as defined by the Set Display Level function under the Options menu Defaults to Attribute Text Layer You can specify a user defined layer Size Determines the size of the text of a displayed text item The size is expressed as a percentage of the default size the default size is the font size for the selected layer Hjust Sets the horizontal justification for the placement of text items left center or right Vjust Sets the vertical justification for placing text items top normal or bottom Global Editing of Attributes Schematics allows you to change an attribute on multiple parts at the same time Assigning the same attribute value to multiple parts 1 Select more than one part or select an area of the drawing enclosing the parts 2 Select the Edit Attributes button A confirmation dialog box appears asking if you want to globally edit attributes of all
164. f Glossary 3 multiple elements selecting in symbol editor 6 14 multiple line text adding 4 50 multiple pages viewing 4 62 multi sheet designs connectivity 4 60 N navigating moving down in hierarchy 7 15 moving up in hierarchy 7 15 through hierarchical designs 7 15 to top of hierarchy 7 15 navigation Glossary 3 nesting hierarchical symbols 7 9 net definition of Glossary 3 netlist definition of Glossary 4 simulation 8 8 netlisting configuration items D 1 EDIF D 4 levels of schematics 7 18 preferences D 3 new attributes creating 4 12 new features of release Vii new file opening 4 3 New File button 3 7 4 3 5 8 New Symbol button 5 9 6 4 node names netlisting preferences D 3 Index 10 nodeset definition of Glossary 4 non electrical information adding 4 50 annotation symbols 4 58 O off page port definition of Glossary 4 symbol 4 38 using 4 38 offset horizontal 4 20 vertical 4 20 online Help 3 48 Open File button 3 7 4 3 5 8 opening existing file 4 3 file 3 7 new file 4 3 options auto fit 4 65 auto naming 1 13 4 32 auto repeat 1 9 4 19 configuration 3 15 drawing 4 33 editor configuration 1 7 grid spacing 5 17 OrCAD importing A 4 orthogonality 4 33 printing 4 64 scaling 4 65 specifying gravity 5 17 text grid 5 19 OrCAD differences between OrCAD SDT and Schematics A 9 import options A 4 importing A 2 origin 6 28 definition of Glossary
165. f zones for each axis Type the margin sizes for each axis Select letters or numbers for zone designators in each plane 5 Select Ascending or Descending in reference to the upper left corner of the page in each plane 6 Click OK to accept the Zoned border and exit the Page Settings dialog box Note Line widths for the page boundary are specified in the Display Preferences dialog box See Setting the default graphics properties through Display Preferences on page 4 56 for more information Configuring Schematics 3 27 To round the corners on the outside border line select the Rounded Corners check box 3 28 Using the Schematic Editor Drawing Area Changing the drawing area size 1 From the Options menu select Editor Configuration to display the Editor Configuration dialog box shown on 3 26 Page Settings 2 Click Page Settings to display the Page Settings dialog box Page Size fe y r Drawing Area Width 15 20 in Height 170 in Pin to Pin Spacing 00 10 in Borders C Outline I Rounded Comers Zoned Horizontal Vertical Zones ff Zones 2 Margin 00 38 in Margin 00 62 in C Letters Ascending Letters Ascending Numbers Descending C Numbers C Descending Cancel Note Drawing areas for 3 In the Width and Height text boxes type the drawing area zoned and outline border dimensions for the page size types are the same size see Figure 3 1 on page 3 24 4 Click OK to exit th
166. ferences Specifying Board Layout Node Name Netlisting Preferences Customizing EDIF NetlistS o Appendix EAttribute List OVEIVIEW rare del RA E BH HS OG Appendix FSymbol Libraries OVERVIEW 6 4 5 48 2 e e HR e Using Symbol Libraries aerea ws ek ee we Contents xiii Glossary Index Figures Figure 1 1 Figure 1 2 Figure 3 1 Figure 4 1 Figure 4 2 Figure 4 3 Figure 4 4 Figure 4 5 Figure 4 6 Figure 4 7 Figure 4 8 Figure 4 9 Figure 4 10 Figure 4 11 Figure 4 12 Figure 4 13 Figure 4 14 Figure 6 1 Figure 6 2 Figure 7 1 Figure 7 2 Figure 9 1 Figure 11 1 Figure 11 2 Figure 11 3 Interaction of MicroSim Software Programs and Files 1 3 Opto isolated Addressable Serial to parallel Converter Circuit 1 5 Border Styles a dias Seeded end ech He Be ES GO ee de 3 24 Placing Resistors with Various Vertical and Horizontal Offsets 4 20 Auto Naming for Bus Labels o e 4 22 Orthogonal Wire Drawing s isa e rd HE eS 4 33 Rubberbanding with Orthogonal enabled 4 36 Rubberbanding with Orthogonal disabled 4 36 Rubberbanded path showing a potential connection 4 37 Off page Port ace cde aop Gee oe A Rw ao eB a 4 38 Global Ports 3 i ee 4 86 ib A Ss OS ee Ow oO oe Oe ore 4 38 Selectiontectangle 4 0 04 3 40 44 84 dood db De BD Gd Bh eR aod ae 4 40 Printing with Auto Fit Enabled
167. fining shared power and ground pins defined above if there are any shared power pins ground pins 1 From the Packaging menu select Edit to display the or both you have to define them Package Definition dialog box see 6 38 as hidden pins 2 Click Edit Shared Pins to display the Shared Pin Assignments dialog box Edit Shared Pins TIEA Pin Name Pin No anaa a Delete OK Cancel 3 Type the name of the pin as defined on the symbol in the Pin Name text box Type the physical pin number in the Pin No text box Click Add Click Save Assignment Click OK In the Package Definition dialog box click OK ON Oo Ff Specifying Part Packaging Information 6 43 Specifying Which Pins Can Be Swapped Pins within a gate that are logically equivalent to one another can be swapped Pin swapping is usually done during layout to minimize the complexities of circuit routing Enabling pin swapping 1 From the Packaging menu select Edit to display the Package Definition dialog box see 6 38 2 Click Edit Pin Swaps to display the Pin Swaps dialog box Edit Pin Swaps Package 7410 Gates ABC Pin Names A B C Y Pin Swaps o clear DK Cancel 3 Inthe Pin Names list select two or more pins that you want to swap 4 Click Assign Assign The pin numbers appear in the Pin Swaps list separated by commas 5 Repeat steps 3 and 4 for any other pin number combinations that you want to swap Clic
168. for Multi gate Components Defining the number of gates and their gate names 1 From the Packaging menu select Edit to display the Package Definition dialog box see 6 38 Click Edit Gate Types to display the Edit Gate Types dialog Edit Gate Types box 7410 Package Definition 7400 plb xj Package Name 7410 AKO Change AKO of Gates 3 of Gate Types 1 Edit Gate Types Package Types DIP14 z _Edit Package Types li Pin Assignments Edit Gate Types Lx Gate Type Gates Parts that have the same gates have only one type of gate gate 1 by default By defining the names of each gate you also define the number of gates Select the entry in the list labeled 1 In the Gates text box type the names of the gates separated by commas for example A B C D Click Change Click OK In the Package Definition dialog box click OK 6 42 Creating and Editing Symbols After you have defined the Defining pin number assignments names of the gates you must f define pin numbers for each pin 1 From the Packaging menu select Edit to display the in each gate Package Definition dialog box see 6 38 2 Click Edit Pins to display the Pin Assignments dialog box see 6 40 3 In the Pin No text box type a pin number for each pin for each gate defined in the previous procedure Click Save Assignment Click OK In the Package Definition dialog box click OK On the symbol for the gate De
169. g box 2 Select the Display Name check box to disable the name display 3 Click OK Displaying the pin number By default pins you place on symbols will have their pin numbers displayed To disable pin numbers do the following 1 Double click the pin or pin number to display the Change Pin dialog box 6 26 Creating and Editing Symbols 2 Click the Edit Attributes button to display the Edit Attributes dialog box Select the PIN entry in the list In the What to Display frame select None to disable the pin number display Click Save Attr Click OK In the Change Pin dialog box click OK Defining and Editing Pin Types 6 27 Defining and Editing Hidden Power and Ground Pins With the symbol editor you can set a pin to be invisible If you set the visibility off you must supply the name of a connecting net typically a global net like G_DPWR or G_DGND for the pin in the Net text box The net is recorded as a symbol attribute not a pin attribute The 1PIN lt pinname gt lt net name gt attribute conveys the net name If G_ lt net names gt are used for simulation reasons this is the case in MicroSim supplied libraries they can be mapped to a more conventional menu for printed circuit board purposes through the xnt files For a specific printed circuit board layout editor there is a lt toolname gt xnt file that will convert a schematic net name into a different one Note Itis possible to map two dis
170. g the trace in the layout for a net on the schematic 1 From the Tools menu select Cross Probe Layout in Schematics 2 Select any segment of any wire that is part of the net Highlighting multiple components or traces at once 1 Select the parts or wires in the schematic 2 From the Tools menu select Cross Probe Layout Applying Backward ECOs Each time a change is made to the layout such as placement of anew component deletion of an existing component change to areference designator addition of a net or addition and deletion of pins from nets MicroSim PCBoards notes the change When you save the layout MicroSim PCBoards writes all changes to a backward ECO file bco The next time you load the design into Schematics the backward ECO file is checked and the backward ECO process begins Changes can be applied selectively to the schematic Some changes are handled automatically by Schematics gate swaps pin swaps reference designator changes others must be manually applied deletion or addition of components deleting or adding pins to a net addition or deletion of nets An audit trail of ECO decisions if changes are pending ignored or require manual insertion is maintained in the backward ECO log file b1g Refer to the Applying Backward ECOs section of the MicroSim PCBoards User s Guide for more details Interfacing with MicroSim PCBoards 11 23 Applying Forward ECOs Changes made to the schematic c
171. ge displays If you already have Schematics running with another schematic displayed click the New File icon to start a new schematic Command Line Options Schematics supports a number of command line options that enable you to customize the start up mode You can add one or more of these options to the Command Line text box of the Program Item Properties dialog box File Properties from within the Program Manager for the Windows Schematics program icon The command line options are Option Description l activates Schematics using a specific file lt filename ini gt specified by lt filename ini gt for configuration settings rather than the default msim ini sym activates Schematics with a new Symbol Editor document window lt filename gt activates Schematics and loads the schematic file specified by lt filename sch gt Example Drawing a Schematic 1 7 Checking Symbol Libraries Configuration When you installed Schematics you selected a set of libraries to be installed These are global libraries which means the symbols contained in them are available to be used in any new or existing schematic Check to see that you have the correct symbol libraries configured for this example 1 From the Options menu select Editor Configuration 2 Check that the following libraries are included in the Note f you are using the Libraries list box evaluation version of Schematics you will be using 7400 slb plb
172. ge line to display a menu 2 Click Find In Design Online Help The Message Viewer has an online Help feature that allows you to view a help message directly relating to the currently selected message To view a context sensitive Help message 1 In the message viewer window select the message 2 Press F1 Locating the Source of a Message Many messages displayed in the Message Viewer contain a hypertext link that points to the source of the message This allows you to go to the location in the design that caused the message to be generated To locate the source of a message double click the message in the Message Viewer window Indicated Severity Each message is preceded by a marker The color of the marker indicates the severity of the message Color Indication Blue Informational message No user action is required Yellow Warning message May require some user action Red Error message Must be corrected before continuing Black Fatal error message Indicates a non recoverable error condition Additional Information Some messages contain additional text That is the message contains several lines of information while only one line displays Lines containing additional information are indicated by a plus sign in the severity marker preceding the message text When the Message Viewer contains any messages with additional information the More Info button on the tool bar is active 1 Click eith
173. ght side of the block lt P gt lt P2 gt lt P gt lt P gt You can move the interface port symbols in the same way that you move other symbols You can also associate an existing schematic with a hierarchical block See Associating an Existing Schematic on page 7 8 Creating and Editing Hierarchical Blocks 7 7 Editing a pin name on a hierarchical block 1 Select the pin on the hierarchical block 2 Click the Edit Attributes button to display the Change Pin dialog box Pin Name Edit Attributes M Display Name 3 Pin Attributes Ippe normal Pin 1 Orient horizontal EFE nae E ERC don t care bd Hiust fiert z Vjust roma El pr Float ror Size fioo Y Modeled Pin T Hidden Net Cancel 3 Type the desired pin name in the Pin Name text box 4 Click OK Deleting a pin on a hierarchical block 1 Select the pin 2 Press Delete Double click the pin to achieve the same results as steps 1 and 2 7 8 Creating and Editing Hierarchical Designs Ol You can also double click the block to display the Set Up Block dialog box Associating an Existing Schematic Instead of pushing into the block to create a schematic see 7 5 you can associate an existing schematic with a hierarchical block Associating an existing schematic with a hierarchical block 1 Select the Draw block button Place the block and be sure it stays selected 3 From the Naviga
174. gression of screens which provide you with information ask you questions and present you with choices based on your selection in the first screen shown below Creating New Symbols 6 3 If you are creating a symbol for an existing simulation model refer to the Creating Symbols for Models chapter in your PSpice user s guide 6 4 Creating and Editing Symbols Starting the Symbol Wizard 1 From the Part menu select Symbol Wizard 2 Follow the instructions that appear on the screen Note Symbol names cannot contain spaces Use this method when How do you want to you want to create create symbols custom symbols From a model library E i Help Cancel Back s Emish Creating a Symbol by Copying Another Symbol An easy way to create a symbol is to make a copy of a similar symbol and modify the copy Making a Copy of a Symbol Copying a symbol from another library 1 5 You can now edit the symbol Saving the symbol places it in the From the Part menu select Copy to display the Copy Part dialog box New Part Name Existing Part Name Library lt new gt Part Select Lib Cancel Click Select Lib in the Open dialog box and select a library Schematics lists all of the library parts in the Parts box Type the name of the part to be copied in the Existing Part Name text box or select 1t from the Part list Type a new name for the part in the New Part Name te
175. guration dialog box The current drawing and all subsequent new drawings use the style you select 1 From the Options menu select Editor Configuration to display the Editor Configuration dialog box Editor Configuration Library Settings Page Settings App Settings Libraries sib plb F48C slo plb P44CT stb plb 7485 slb plb 7445 sib plo 74F sib plb 74H slb plb 74HC sib plb zi Library Path d msim lib d msim SlibSBLOX d msim8 AlibeC 2000 Title Block Symbol Jittebk Autosave interval 1710 min I Monochrome Mode 2 Click Page Settings to display the Page Settings dialog box Page Settings x Page Size p Drawing Area Width 15 20 in Height 11 70 Pin to Pin Spacing 00 10 in Borders C Outline I Rounded Comers Zoned Horizontal r Vertical Zones 4 Zones 2 Margin 00 38 in Margin 00 62 in C Letters Ascending Lettes Ascending Numbers C Descending C Numbers C Descending Cancel 3 Select the page size for which you want to set the border style You can select either style for each page size 4 Select the Outline or Zoned border style For style Do this Outline 1 Inthe Borders frame click the Outline button 2 Click OK to accept the Outline border and exit the Page Settings dialog box Zoned 1 Inthe Borders frame click the Zoned button 2 Type the number o
176. h the browser remaining open or click Place amp Close to place the part and close the browser If you leave the browser open click the title bar of the dialog box and drag it to a new location Example Drawing a Schematic 1 9 Placing resistors R1 and R2 1 7 From the Draw menu select Get New Part to display the Part Browser dialog box shown on 1 8 Type R in the Part Name text box Click Place amp Close The outline of the resistor becomes attached to the pointer Note that as you move the pointer the X and Y coordinates at the left of the Status Bar bottom of the window change These coordinates show the location of the pointer from origin 0 0 upper left corner to the closest 0 01 inch or closest mm if you are using a metric page size Press Cirl R to rotate the resistor before placing it Move the pointer to the 2 40 1 80 coordinates within a few hundredths of the inch is close enough and click to place the resistor on the schematic If the Stay on Grid option is enabled parts are automatically placed on the nearest grid point Move the pointer to 2 40 3 90 and click again to place the second resistor on the schematic Right click to stop placing the part Placing resistors R3 through R6 You can quickly place resistors R3 through R6 using the Auto Repeat function 1 From the Options menu select Auto Repeat to display the Auto Repeat dialog box a Set Horizontal Offset to 00 00 and
177. he bus A 10 Importing OrCAD SDT Schematics Wires that cross pins exactly at the pin hotspot are translated as connected Unlabeled wires connected to buses are translated as unconnected wires that is they are not connected to the bus Wires and buses in Schematics can only have a single label Any connections bus mapping or splitting that use the OrCAD multiple label feature will not translate correctly In Schematics you will need to manually reconnect these wires and buses In Schematics you can split a bus directly by labeling the subbus with a subset of the signals on the main bus For example if the main bus is data 0 15 you can connect a bus to it and label it data 0 7 and connect this directly to a port or pin with a name of the same width such as inputData 0 7 See Splitting buses on page 4 31 By default Schematics does not consider wires with the same label to be connected unless they are drawn as connected You must connect them to offpage ports or enable the Connectivity Via Labels option To change the default see Enabling connectivity via labels on page A 8 Simulation Simulation attributes that are added to symbols are based on information from the OrCAD SDT standard libraries Therefore pin name references in these attributes can be incorrect if a part such as user drawn is being used that has the same name as another part from the standard libraries for example on the schematic
178. he dialog box and place the global port Labeling a global port 1 Double click the port to display the Set Attribute Value dialog box see 4 29 Type the label in the LABEL text box Click OK Using Ports 4 39 Note A quick way to place the global port is to type global in the Get Recent Part list box on the toolbar 4 40 Creating and Editing Designs Iis A ME F En MA 5 7422 740 TE i HTA R 2 Stall 7400 selection rectang Figure 4 9 Selection rectangle Selecting and Moving Objects and Attributes Before performing any operation on a schematic object you have to select the object You can make multiple selections or select whole areas of the schematic After you select an object you can move copy delete edit cut and paste that object Selecting Selecting an object a part wire or bus on the schematic 1 Point to the object with the pointer and click to select it The object color change the default is red indicates it is selected After the object is selected you are ready to perform an action Selecting a new object causes the selection of any previously selected objects to be cancelled Selecting more than one object 1 Hold down while selecting multiple objects individually The objects change color to indicate they are selected Selecting all objects within a given area of your schematic 1 Draw a
179. he reference designator on the schematic To change the pin number gate double click the pin number Two connector symbols that represent single pins of a connector are DB25 and EDGE40 Connectors 11 5 Creating Single Pin Connector Symbols When creating a connector pin symbol you must correctly define the connector package for the layout netlist to be correct For example in creating a 62 pin edge connector instead of creating a single symbol for a 62 pin edge connector with all 62 pins you can create a symbol of a single connector pin and attach to it PKGREF and GATE attributes created and assigned when the symbol is placed You would then assign the attribute values for each instance of the pin to make the correct pin assignment to the connector Each pin in the connector is the equivalent of a single gate in a multi gate package Therefore by assigning to each connector pin instance a specific combination of PKGREF and GATE attribute values you can define the wiring of the connector in the layout 11 6 Preparing Your Design for Board Layout Packaging the Parts in Your Design Symbols used in Schematics represent either an individual gate of a packaged device or a complete device When a symbol representing a single gate is placed on a schematic it is assigned a unique reference designator if Auto Naming is enabled and by default is made the first gate in the package Packaging is the process of collecti
180. he report Closing the Reports dialog box 1 Click Close Printing and Saving the Report Printing a Bill of Materials report 1 If not already in the Reports dialog box select Reports from the File menu 2 In the Reports dialog box click Print Print Writing the Bill of Materials report to a file 1 Ifnot already in the Reports dialog box select Reports from the File menu 2 In the Reports dialog box click Save As to display a 5 ave As standard Save dialog box _Saveds _ 11 14 Preparing Your Design for Board Layout Customizing the Format of the Report Setup 1 Click Setup to display the Report Setup dialog box Report Setup ix Bill of Materials Format erka TYPE VALUE Component Description File user cdf Print Output Format Text E C Database E Cancel 2 Inthe Format text box type the attributes to be displayed in the report according to the following syntax descriptive text lt attribute name gt where the sign indicates value substitution for the named attribute Specify multiple attributes by using the preceding syntax in a comma separated list For example you could specify that the part instance VALUE attribute and your own user defined attributes COST and ADDR be reported by typing the following into the Format text box value VALUE cost COST address ADDR 3 In the Component Description File text box ent
181. hematic Schematics uses the file orc_map txt to search for default package types A list is created of all parts with no found entries The Package Types dialog box enables you to assign package types for these parts The default is to make the package type footprint name the same as the part name Other options in the Package Types dialog box e The Package Type section lists the package types to be assigned to the corresponding parts The initial default is to assign a footprint with the same name as the part e The Parts section lists the parts with no default package information available e Package Types defines the name of the package type to assign to the selected parts You can enter a name or select one from the list e Set Package Type assigns the package type to the selected parts in the Package Types text box A 6 Importing OrCAD SDT Schematics PSpice Simulation Device Types Dialog Box PSpice Simulation Device Types m Part Identification Part RefDes Device Available Device Types BATTERY BT1 Ga sFET a a sed Cancel BRIDGE D1 DIODE CAPACITOR_POL CAPACITOR CAPACITOR_POL CAPACITOR DIODE D2 DIODE DIODE D3 DIODE DIODE D4 DIODE NPN Q2 BI_P_TRANSISTOF RESISTOR R3 RESISTOR RESISTOR_VAR RESISTOR TRANSFORMER T TRANS_LINE lt lt Set Device Type To convert OrCAD SDT part field data needed for simulation Schematics must know the PSpice device type for each part
182. hematic represents a progressive stage of development working schematic 1st checkpoint 2nd checkpoint MySchem schematic schematic Checkpoint 001 Checkpoint 002 readme fsksub rdm INTER1 235Meg dme subrar NTERZ85Meg o Altenuator pam ac E Figure 9 1 A Working Schematic and Two Checkpoint Schematics When documenting development stages and performing what 1f analysis you can e perform all MicroSim Schematics PSpice and Probe operations on a checkpoint schematic e create up to 999 checkpoint schematics e restore a checkpoint schematic to a working schematic status Design Journal Help For a detailed explanation of how to use Design Journal and how it interacts with Probe see Schematics Help Design Journal Help 9 3 Restoring a checkpoint schematic removes its checkpoint status and makes it a normal sch type schematic Targeting Your Design for Programmable Logic 10 Overview This chapter provides an overview on using Schematics for designing circuits that contain programmable logic This chapter contains the following sections Targeting PLDs CPLDs Using PLSyn on page 10 2 Targeting Xilinx FPGAs on page 10 4 10 2 Targeting Your Design for Programmable Logic IMPL is short for implementation Targeting PLDs CPLDs Using PLSyn Schematics runni
183. her if you want to have both connectivity and a physical part by attaching an off page port to the pin of the connector Table 11 1 Distinctions Between Connectors and Ports Connectors Ports define physical connection points on the PCB define logical connection points on the schematic are not included in layout netlists are included in layout netlists cannot be used to create connectivity on the schematic are used to create connectivity on the schematic are not logical devices are not physical connectors Placing Connectors Connectors are added by placing connector symbols on the schematic You can use the connector symbols shipped with Schematics found in the connect s1b symbol library or you can create your own using the symbol editor See Chapter 5 Using the Symbol Editor There are two styles of connector symbols e those representing the entire connector e those representing a single pin of a connector Connectors 11 3 During simulation connectors are largely ignored except that you can attach a marker to a connector pin to view waveforms in Probe You can also connect stimuli to connector pins to simulate the external interface to the circuit 11 4 Preparing Your Design for Board Layout OOO in Oh Oo OO A oP Figure 11 1 Entire Connector Symbol 1 EL DB25 Figure 11 2 Single Pin Symbol Using Connector Symbols that Represent the Entire Connector These symbols wi
184. his allows you to align text between drawing grid points Display Options r Opti Iv r M Rubberband Y Snap to Grid Y Orthogonal M Snapto Pin I CursorX and Y M Stay on Grid Grid Spacing O E Enabling text grid and specifying text grid size Text Grid From the Options menu select Display Options M Stay on Grid Grid Size o0 02 in r Snap to Pin Gravity 00 01 in Cancel 2 Inthe Text Grid frame select the Stay on Grid check box to enable the text grid In the Grid Size text box type the text grid spacing value Click OK Setting the Autosave Interval The autosave interval specifies the time interval in minutes which Schematics automatically saves any modified schematics or libraries Setting the Autosave interval Editor Configuration Linares 1 From the Options menu select Editor Configuration to Library Settings n m display the Editor Configuration dialog box 7400 slb plo 7AAC lb plo 74ACT lb pb 744L5 slb plb Pi Settings HAS Lb pl pes 2 Inthe Autosave interval box type the number of minutes for TAF sib plb A FANE ae ey z _ApaSetings _ the autosave interval Library Path Emma ie deAmnsime ibSMELOM a msma MIbXC2OON 3 Click OK Title Block Symbol titleblk Autosave interval 70 min IT Monochrome Mode Cancel When Autosave is enabled Schematics creates a temporary file
185. hy 7 19 Schematics then searches the parent level It continues up the hierarchy until it either finds a definition or until it reaches the top of the hierarchy e When Schematics finds an attribute it evaluates the attribute at the level where it is found If the attribute value refers to other attributes those other attributes must exist at the present level or higher in the hierarchy For example hierarchical symbol A defines two attributes x Y and Y 10 Symbol A contains an instance of a symbol B B contains an expression referring to the attribute x X and defines the value of attribute Y to be 20 Y 20 The evaluation of the expression x is X is searched for on the present level There is no X attribute at this level so the parent environment symbol A is searched An attribute named x is found at this level this attribute is evaluated in the environment supplied by A The first stage of this evaluation delivers the result ey this is then processed to yield the result 10 The final result is to make the result of the expression in B be 10 X 10 The definition for Y in the environment supplied by symbol B is not used when evaluating X in A s environment 7 20 Creating and Editing Hierarchical Designs Example Creating a Hierarchical Design This example shows you how to create schematics from the top level down The design consists of a simple schematic with a block representing a CM
186. ide toggles the display of s 1 Voltage on voltages for selected wires 8 8 Selected Net s T Enable Bias toggles the display of bias Current Display current Show Hide toggles the display of l Currents on currents for selected Selected Part s device pins Main Window 3 11 Refer to the Viewing Results on the Schematic chapter in your PSpice user s guide for information about how to use these toolbar buttons 3 12 Using the Schematic Editor Annotation Graphics The Annotation Graphics toolbar provides shortcuts for drawing or inserting non electrical information onto your schematic Annotation Graphics xo o c 8 1 Table 3 4 Annotation Graphics Toolbar Button Name Function Page Draw Arc draws an arc shape on the 6 10 page Ol Draw Box draws a box on the page 6 11 Ol Draw Circle draws a circle on the page 6 11 Draw Polyline draws a polyline on the 6 11 page BR Draw Text places of a single line of 4 53 wid text on the page 6 12 Draw Text places multiple lines of text 4 50 Box on the schematic Insert Picture places a bitmap bmp 4 57 dib or Windows metafile wmf on the page Main Window 3 13 Status Bar The status bar is located at the bottom of the schematic editor window and provides the following e X and Y coordinates of the pointer Use the Display Options selection under the Options menu to toggle display of X and Y coordinates e
187. ied with i on command line Use default msim ini Type the file name of the configuration file in the text box Click OK to exit the App Setting dialog box In the Editor Configuration dialog box click OK Specifying a different text editor Editing text in Schematics is done through MicroSim s Textedit program You have the option to specify a different text editor 1 From the Options menu select Editor Configuration to display the Editor Configuration dialog box shown on 3 39 Click App Settings to display the App Settings dialog box shown on 3 39 In the Other Commands box select Text Editor Type a new path name in the Command text box to specify the path and name of the text editor you want to use Click OK to exit the App Settings dialog box In the Editor Configuration dialog box click OK Controlling the Display in Schematics 3 41 Changing the Get Recent Part List Size The Get Recent Part list box on the toolbar contains a scroll down list of recently placed parts The default length of this list is ten items To change the length of the list use a text editor to edit the MRPLISTSIZE item in the SCHEMATICS section of the msim ini file MRPLISTSIZE lt length of list gt 3 42 Using the Schematic Editor or press Ctrl 1 fg or press Ctrl or press Ctrl O Or press Ctrl O Zooming and Panning in Schematics Zooming When working on
188. ill implement this DIP CC CC Note that the DIP rule is empty it matches package classes such as DIP14 but there is no resulting replacement string The LCC rule matches all strings that start with LCC so it will match package classes such as LCC20 and LCC28 It appends the string Cc to the COMPONENT or PART name Back Annotation During the course of layout generation a design can undergo changes that make the design information in the PCB layout database inconsistent with that in the schematic database When this occurs the schematic must be back annotated with the design changes made during layout to resynchronize the schematic and layout data Design changes are usually documented as Engineering Change Orders ECOs Design changes from the layout to the schematic are called Backward ECOs because the direction of the change is opposite to the regular flow of design data Schematics supports the following types of backward ECOs e changing the reference designator of a part e swapping two gates e swapping two pins If any of the other ECO operations are present Schematics logs the warning and displays them as Unsupported function messages You need to manually make the changes for any of the unsupported functions listed in the back annotation log Back annotation messages are logged in the same manner as other Schematics errors and warnings You can automatically apply backward ECOs from ECO files genera
189. ill of Materials report 1 From the File menu select Reports to display the Reports dialog box shown on 11 13 2 Click Setup to display the Report Setup dialog box shown on 11 14 3 In the Print Output Format area click Database Select Database to format the Bill of Materials report with one attribute name or value pair per entry This results in Generating a Bill of Materials Report 11 17 multiple entries for component types with multiple attributes Click OK In the Reports dialog box click OK 11 18 Preparing Your Design for Board Layout Swapping Pins To swap pins on a given gate add a SWAP attribute with the value of the pin names of the two pins to be swapped For example SWAP A B will swap pin A with pin B Edit Menu Eo Navigate S Swapping pins ER 1 From the Edit menu select Attributes to display the Copy Chee Attribute Editing dialog box Delete DEL Name Value Select All VALUE tk TEMPLATE R REFDES 1 2 7TOLERANCEIR REFL Change Display Attributes REFDES A1 PART A TOLERANCE PKGTYPE RCO5 GATE z IV Include Non changeable Attributes na IV Include System defined Attributes Cancel 2 Inth text box t Note A and B must be pin n the Name text box type SWAP names not pin numbers 3 In the Value text box type A B 4 Click Save Attr 5 Click OK Save Attr Interfacing with MicroSim PCBoards 11 19 Interfacing with MicroSim PCBo
190. im program entry and select LXCWin i Close Help Messages Expanding Library Definitions into Text Files C 3 Expanding Library Definitions into Text Files When you use LXCWin to expand a library it reads the selected library line by line and writes each definition of a symbol sym package pkg or footprint fpd in plain ASCII format to a text file It also creates a 1st file detailing the file name and the corresponding definition name To expand a library into individual definition files 1 From the Action frame select Expand 2 Click the Process File button 3 Select a library Compressing Definition Files into a Library When you use LXCWin to compress definitions it reads The individual definition files are the 1st file a file of the same name as the library you automatically removed selected and packs each listed file into a selected library in the order read Thus symbol package and footprint libraries can be built from files generated by another process To compress individual definition files into a library 1 Inthe Action frame select Compress 2 Click the Process File button 3 Specify a library C 4 Library Expansion and Compression Utility Salvaging a Corrupted File To salvage a corrupted file or one that has carriage returns and line feeds 1 Inthe Action frame select Fix Index 2 Click the Process File button 3 Select a library Reorganizing a Library
191. in number assignments for each package type in which a device is available Because a device may be available in several package types DIP14 LCC20 and so on and each may have different pin number assignments a single package definition can contain more than one pin assignment list Each pin assignment list is associated with a list of package types footprints that the pin number assignments are valid for Specifying Part Packaging Information 6 35 Packaging Definitions Packaging information is kept in a package definition separate from the symbol definition Both are maintained using the symbol editor By default the name of the package definition for a symbol corresponds to the symbol name This can be overridden by explicitly adding a COMPONENT attribute to the symbol Such an attribute is generally used for devices that have non standard part names such as BJTs those with names that begin with a Q or for those with more than one type of gate Package definitions are stored in package libraries These libraries typically have the same name as the corresponding symbol libraries but a different extension plb Package libraries are similar to symbol libraries in that they must be configured into the schematic editor s list of libraries With the Packaging menu in the symbol editor you can create and edit package definitions Note f you created a symbol Creati ng a New Package with the Symbol Wizard it wil
192. in the bounding box Attributes do not need to be contained within the bounding box 6 30 Creating and Editing Symbols ez Editing Symbol Attributes You can add attributes properties to a symbol When you add an attribute you specify a name and a default value This value can be changed when the symbol is used on a schematic You can specify whether or not to display the attribute There are two attributes that are automatically added to symbols that are created e The REFDES attribute whose default value is U specifies the reference designator pattern to use in the schematic editor e The PART attribute displays the symbol s name Note When the symbol is placed on the schematic Schematics automatically fills in the value of the PART attribute to be the name you used to place the symbol For example if the symbol has several aliases it fills in the alias that you used Therefore you can assign a value in the symbol editor and use it to place the text on the symbol but when the symbol is used the value will be reassigned Adding an attribute 1 From the Part menu select Attributes to display the Attributes dialog box Editing Symbol Attributes Attributes Name VALUE Value Tk Delati What to Display FEMPLATE R REFDES 7 Value only REFDES R Name only PART R Both name and value TOLERANCE Both name and value only if value defined C None Display Characteristics Este
193. ind a part by name are the same in either dialog box When typing a part name ora description you can use the and 2 wildcard characters An is a wildcard that matches zero or more characters For example 74LS1 matches 74LS10 74LS107A and 74LS197 A is a wildcard that matches any single character For example 74LS1 matches 74LS10 but not 74LS107A Place Searching for Parts in the Libraries Symbol libraries contain symbols for many parts There are three methods for selecting parts from libraries e Search for the part by name e Search for the part by description e Browse through the symbol libraries Each of these methods are described below Selecting a part by name 1 From the Draw menu select Get New Part to display one of the Part Browser dialog boxes Part Browser Basic Part Name 54 De escription Connection bubble Close Place Place amp Close Help Libraries Advanced gt gt xj Full List 2 Type the name of the part in the Part Name text box or select the part name from the list of available parts at the left side of the dialog box 3 Click Place to place the part with the browser remaining open or click Place amp Close to place the part and close the browser 4 5 Move the outline of the selected symbol to any location on the schematic and click to place the part Right click to stop placing parts
194. ing Symbol Graphics There are several graphics tools available for drawing symbols With these tools you can draw circles lines arcs and boxes You can also place pins and text on your symbol The default properties of the individual display layers such as colors line width and style are set in the Display Preferences dialog box See Controlling the Display in Schematics on page 3 34 or Adding Non Electrical Information on page 4 50 for information on how to change display properties Elements of a Symbol A symbol consists of various elements such as arcs boxes lines circles polylines text and pins placed in specific locations Arc Drawing an arc 1 Click the Draw Arc button to change the pointer to a pencil shape Click to establish an end point for the arc Click again to establish the other end point for the arc A straight dotted line connects the two end points J 4 Move the pointer out from the last end point and the dotted r line becomes an arc When the arc reaches the desired shape X click to fix the arc at that location Box Drawing a box 1 Click the Draw Box button to change the pointer to a pencil shape Click at the location for the upper left corner of the box Move the pointer down and to the right A dotted box outline follows the pointer Click to set the lower right corner of the box Circle Drawing a circle 1 Click the Draw Circle button to change the pointer to a p
195. ing the Display in Schematics 3 37 Select a font and size from their corresponding list boxes and click OK A sample of the selected font is shown in the Sample box Enter a size in either inches or millimeters or accept the system default for the selected font Select a color from the Color list box Click Apply to apply the changes and keep the dialog box displayed for further changes or click OK to apply the changes and close the dialog box Configuring Colors The colors for all layers in Schematics are configured in the Display Preferences dialog box The colors you specify become the defaults however they may be changed as often as necessary Configuring Colors in your Schematic 1 From the Options menu select Display Preferences to display the Display Preferences dialog box shown on page 3 36 Select one or more layers from the Display Layers list Click the tab that applies to the layers you have selected For example if you want to change a text color select the layer click the Text tab and select the appropriate display settings Select a color from the Color drop down list Click Apply to apply the changes and keep the dialog box open for further changes or click OK to apply the changes and close the dialog box Display Layers Page Boundary Simulation Currents Simulation Voltages Stimulus User Text 2 Wires 3 38 Using the Schematic Editor App Settings Changing Applicat
196. inition will only become important when you are ready to simulate the design Diode Bridge Rectifier For this example assume there is a subcircuit definition named BRIDGE stored in a library file called mylib 11ib on your local drive The subcircuit definition would look like the following SUBCKT BRIDGE 1 2 3 4 D1 4 1 D1N914 D2 1 D1N914 3 D3 4 2 D1N914 3 D4 2 D1N914 ENDS The symbol to be created will look very similar to Figure 6 2 Example Creating Symbols from Scratch 6 51 BRIDGE Figure 6 2 Example of Diode Bridge Rectifier Symbol Opening or Creating a Symbol Library To open or create a symbol library 1 In the schematic editor from the File menu select Edit Library to open the symbol editor To add this symbol to an existing symbol library a From the File menu select Open b Navigate to your file and open it If you want to create a new library a From the File menu select Save As b After you type in a name click Yes to add it to the list of configured libraries From the Part menu Select New to open the Definition dialog box Enter e A description of the device optional it will display when you browse for a symbol in the schematic editor e A name a symbol name to get the part in Schematics in this case it is Bridge Note that the file status is lt new gt lt new gt at the top of the window This means it is
197. instance of schematic 7 17 multi sheet designs 4 60 open package library 6 37 package definition 6 37 package definition active symbol 6 37 package types 6 37 page title 4 46 part attributes 4 12 part origin 6 28 parts 4 9 pin name on hierarchical block 7 7 pin numbers 6 40 pin types 6 23 schematic definition 7 17 selecting part 6 20 simulation models 8 6 single line text 4 53 symbol 1 2 symbol default attribute 4 18 text within text box 4 51 title block 4 46 editor configuration 6 48 Editor Configuration dialog box 3 18 6 48 electrical rules check See ERC definition of elements of a symbol 6 10 Enable Bias Current Display button 3 10 Enable Bias Voltage Display button 3 10 enabling automatic panning 3 45 auto repeat 4 19 grid display 3 29 5 16 orthogonal drawing 4 34 pin swapping 6 43 rubberbanding 4 37 snap to grid 5 17 snap to pin 3 31 4 34 5 17 stay on grid 3 30 5 16 text grid 3 32 5 19 toolbar display 3 7 5 8 ERC Glossary 2 examples creating hierarchical design 7 20 drawing a schematic 1 4 using auto naming 4 22 using auto repeat 4 22 existing file opening 4 3 existing schematic associating with a hierarchical block 7 8 Export file specification dialog box B 3 Export Parts dialog box 6 6 exporting bill of materials report 11 16 DXF Files B 1 from the schematics editor B 3 in the Symbol Editor B 4 symbol 6 6 file management 2
198. ion Settings You have the option to change the location of the exe files of the MicroSim programs that Schematics interfaces with You can also configure a different text editor besides MicroSim s Textedit and specify an initialization file other than the installed default initialization file Changing where to find MicroSim programs From the Options menu select Editor Configuration to display the Editor Configuration dialog box Editor Configuration x Libraries fia Library Settings 1 SHOTI sb pib 7400 slb plb 74AC slb plb 74ACT slb plb 748L5 slb plb Page Settings 7485 slb plb 74F slb plb 74H slb plb 74HC slb plb x App Settings Library Path d Amsim lib d sim MibosBLO d Amsim8r MibeC2000 Title Block Symbol Jittebk Cancel Autosave interval fi 0 min I Monochrome Mode 2 Click App Settings to display the App Settings dialog box Controlling the Display in Schematics 3 39 r Simulate Command 7 PspiceAD Command ENEMA Other Commands obe d msim8 PROBE EXE StmEd d msim8 STMED EXE Parts d msim8 PARTS EXE Polaris d msim8 POLARIS EXE PolTran d msim8 POLTRAN EXE PLSyn d msim8 PLSYNSYS PLSYN EXE Command d msim8 PROBE EXE Configuration File If not specified with i on command line Use default msim ini Othe
199. k OK In the Package Definition dialog box click OK 6 44 Creating and Editing Symbols E Save Attr Creating Components With Multiple Gate Types Some components consist of two or more different types of gates for example ECL devices Each type of gate will have a different logical symbol with a unique name but reference the same package definition For these types of components you have to perform several additional steps in defining the package Associating more than one symbol with a component For each symbol 1 La From the Part menu select Attributes to display the Attributes dialog box Attributes Name Value f Del Attr What to Display C Value only C Name only C Both name and value Both name and value only if value defined None Display Characteristics Layer Attribute Text z Changeable in schematic Orient horizontal z I Keep relative rotation Hiust fer Viust bottom 7 Size roo OK Cancel Type a new attribute name COMPONENT in the Name text box Type a value in the Value text box that explicitly specifies the package definition name Example For a 10102 package you could have two symbols 10102NOR and 10102ORNOR Both symbols could have the attribute COMPONENT 10102 Click Save Attr Type a new attribute name GATETYPE in the Name text box Specifying Part Packaging Information 6 45 6 Type a value in the Value text box cor
200. kaging information the symbols and packaging information are not available for use in the schematic editor until the library is configured Configuration consists of adding the library file to the list of configured files Making a symbol library available in Schematics 1 From the schematic editor select Editor Configuration from the Options menu to display the Editor Configuration dialog box see 3 18 Library Settings i Library Settings to display the Library Settings dialog Ox N Library Name ANALOG M Symbol File Extension slb IV Package File Extension plb Add Local 745 slb plb ABM slb ANL_MISC slb plb ANLG2 sib plb ANLG_DEV slb plb OK use in all schematics Cancel 3 Type the name of the new symbol library in the Library Note When you save Name text box without the slb extension changes to a library you will 4 Select the Symbol check box to indicate that the new library be asked if you want to add is a symbol library Symbol libraries are searched in the the library to the list of order in which they are listed in the Library Settings dialog configured libraries Answer box yes if you want to make the library available to all schematics a Click the library name above where you want to include the one you are adding to the list 5 To add a symbol library at a specific point in the list Configuring Custom Libraries 6 49 b Type the
201. l Definition include creating a package definition You can quickly create a package definition for an existing symbol Creating a package definition for an existing symbol 1 Load the symbol in the symbol editor 2 From the Packaging menu select Edit Shortcut press E 3 Click OK to start the Package Wizard 4 Follow the instructions on the screen Creating a package definition from scratch 1 From the Packaging menu select New to start the Package Wizard 2 Follow the instructions on the screen 6 36 Creating and Editing Symbols Packaging Menu EEE view Options Window He Copying a Package Definition With the Copy function in the Packaging menu you can create anew package definition from an existing one It is the same as the Copy function under the Parts menu the definition may be copied from the active library or a different library See Making a Copy of a Symbol on page 5 Copying a package definition 1 From the Packaging menu select Copy to display the Copy Package Definition dialog box Copy Package Definition New Pkg Name m Existing Pkg Name Library lt new gt New Select Lib ox Cancel Type the name of the package to be copied in the Existing Pkg Name text box To select a package definition from another library click Select Lib and select a library from the File Open dialog box Type a new name for the package in the New Pkg Name text box Click OK
202. lb polyfet slb port slb pwrbjt slb pwrmos slb seeq slb sesthom slb sipex slb smos slb sony slb National Semiconductor Inc error detection correction DAC memory controllers National Semiconductor Inc interface controllers network interface National Semiconductor Inc microcontrollers OKI Semiconductor display drivers DRAM EEPROM EPROM DRAM SRAM microcontrollers clock speech synthesis recorders CODEC modems Operational amplifiers voltage comparators voltage regulators voltage references Opto couplers Panasonic Industrial Group ROM DRAM SRAM FIFO PolyFet RF Devices RF MOSFET Global ports off page ports interface ports ground symbols Power bipolar transistors Power MOSFET Seeq Technology Inc data link controllers Manchester code converters SGS_Thompson Microelectronics EPROM SRAM FIFO EEPROM Sipex Corporation ADC DAC voltage references sample and hold amplifiers data acquisition S MOS Systems DC DC converters voltage regulators display drivers SRAM Sony Corporation ADC gates ALU multiplexers SRAM F 8 Symbol Libraries Table F 1 Symbol Libraries continued Symbol Library File Contents Name source slb Voltage and current stimulus devices special slb swit_rav slb swit_reg slb tex_inst slb thyristr slb til slb ti2 sIb tilsi slb tline slb ttl sIb vlsitec slb weitek sIb wsi slb Xc2
203. le or multiple page A subset of a package and corresponds to a part instance Editing of a symbol attribute or attribute value saved in a library and applied to all designs using that particular symbol Provides a connection to another global port of the same name anywhere in the schematic gravity gravity radius grid hidden pins hierarchical design hotspot instance name interface port junction marker message model definition msim ini file navigation net Glossary 3 The property of a drawing object to snap to the nearest grid or pin when being placed on a drawing or moved about a drawing The distance between the cursor and an object on the schematic in which the object can be selected A pattern of horizontal and vertical lines that aid in placing objects on a schematic or symbol drawing Pins that are not connected by wires and buses but through an attribute that names the net that they belong to A design of more than one level wherein a portion of the design lower level schematic is represented by a block or symbol on a higher level schematic The point at the end of a pin that forms a junction when it intersects with a wire or bus segment A unique name for a part instance A port providing connectivity to the pins of hierarchical symbols or blocks A graphical indication that wires buses and pins are electrically connected Notations placed on a schematic to identify locations fo
204. libraries to use to find symbols Symbols referenced by the schematic are translated and put in a Schematics local symbol library The sdt cfg file must be either in the same directory as the OrCAD SDT schematic or in the TEMPLATE subdirectory under the directory pointed to by the environment variable ORCADPROJ Importing an OrCAD file File Menu 1 From the File menu select Import to display the Input Ea Da ae OrCAD File dialog box New Open Close Input File Translate C MSIMSORCADMIANS1 SCH Browse Destination Directory Close fc AMSIM Browse Options I Include Simulation Information I Include PCB Information 2 Type the name of the file to be imported in the Input File text box or click the Browse button in the Input File area to select a file 3 Type the name of the directory where the translated schematic is to be saved in the Destination Directory text box or click the Browse button to select a file The translated schematic file is given the same name as the original OrCAD SDT schematic file sch extension A translated symbol library is given the same file name but with a scb extension instead of sch Importing OrCAD Files A 3 4 Select the check box for the options you want to select The two options are explained on the following pages 5 Click Translate A 4 Importing OrCAD SDT Schematics Import Options Include Simulation Information Select the I
205. lick to stop placing the part without placing an additional part The outline changes back to a pointer Automatically Assigning Reference Designators The Auto Naming function is useful for assigning reference designators to parts as they are placed The default starting reference designator number is 1 When placing resistors the first one placed is R1 the second R2 and so on You can set the starting reference designator to any number depending on the way you package or organize your design Enabling Auto Naming of reference designators 1 From the Options menu select Auto Naming to display the Auto Naming dialog box Reference Designators V Enable Auto Naming Select the Enable Auto Naming check box Stating Designetor Nos Type a starting designator number if you want the numbering to start at a number other than one 4 Click OK T Enable Auto Increment Label Template Wire Port Labels 4 22 Creating and Editing Designs Example Using Auto Repeat and Auto Naming Use the following procedure to create part of the drawing shown in Figure 4 2 using the Auto Repeat and Auto Naming functions 5 aro inola alz i onl PoHooo ooo o E Figure 4 2 Auto Naming for Bus Labels Placing the bus and part 1 Click the Draw Bus button ES 2 Move the pencil shaped pointer to the location of one end of the first bus segment Click to start d
206. ll have as many pins as the physical connector they represent You can wire signals directly to the pins or connect labeled off page or global ports to each pin The label indicates the signal name that will be connected to the pin Any off page ports in the design with that same signal name will be connected to that connector pin Two connector symbols that represent an entire connector are DB25F B and EDGE40M B Using Connector Symbols that Represent One Pin of a Connector In cases where a connector has a large number of pins you may want to use a symbol that represents a single pin of the connector so you can attach connector pins to nets spread over multiple pages When an instance of such a connector symbol is placed on the schematic 1t is assigned an arbitrary reference designator and gate The reference designator indicates which physical connector instance the connector pin is part of P1 for example and the gate indicates which physical pin such as 1 or 2 Therefore the entire connector is considered a multi gate package with each gate having a single pin All connector pin instances with the same reference designator are a part of the same physical connector Usually you would assign the reference designator and gate manually Otherwise you could automatically package the pins however this will result in an arbitrary grouping of signals which is not usually desired To change the reference designator double click t
207. lock 7 3 R Redraw button 3 8 3 13 5 7 5 9 reference designator assigning 4 21 11 7 auto naming 4 21 changing 1 14 7 5 definition of Glossary 5 value E 3 refreshing the screen 3 13 Remove Package Definition dialog box 6 45 removing configured library 3 20 package definition 6 45 repeating part placement 4 19 Replace Part dialog box 4 24 replacing multiple parts 4 25 parts 4 24 same name parts 4 25 single part 4 24 Report Setup dialog box 11 14 Reports dialog box 11 13 resistor changing default value 4 18 resizing annotation graphics 4 55 bitmap 4 57 bounding box 6 29 hierarchical block 7 5 imported graphic 4 57 text box 4 51 4 52 Windows metafile 4 57 returning to schematic editor 5 6 rewiring 4 29 rotating area of drawing 6 17 area of schematic 4 10 elements of a symbol 6 17 part 1 9 4 10 rubberbanding connectivity 4 35 enabling 4 37 orthogonal disabled with rubberbanding enabled 4 36 with orthogonal enabled 4 36 rules of connectivity 4 30 running simulations for FPGA in Xilinx 10 6 S Save File button 3 7 5 8 7 24 saving bill of materials report 11 13 file 3 7 7 24 7 27 schematic 1 18 symbol 6 8 to a library 6 8 scale factor setting 3 43 scaling 4 65 schematic associating with hierarchical block 7 8 definition of Glossary 5 editing definition 7 17 editing instance of 7 17 locating in hierarchy 7 16 symbolizing 7 10 translating 7 13 sch
208. ly contain all of the information required by the netlister Most symbols in the symbol libraries are primitive parts Hierarchical parts have the same appearance as primitive parts The difference is that hierarchical parts represent one or more levels of schematics and primitive parts do not A hierarchical part is modified by pushing into it from within the schematic editor or symbol editor and editing the associated schematic A primitive part is modified by editing its graphics pins and attributes 3 4 Using the Schematic Editor Ports are not physical connectors If you want a specific pin such as a DB25 pin you must use a symbol for such a connector from the connect slb symbol library Two attributes of a resistor are PKGTYPE package type and VALUE Attribute Value Name PKGTYPE RCO5 VALUE 1K Symbols Symbols are the graphical representation of parts ports and other schematic elements They are grouped by functionality into symbol libraries Each symbol contains a specific set of attributes that define the symbol You can edit these attributes as well as create new attributes Symbols can share similar attributes and graphics Hierarchical symbols represent schematics and are the mechanism that you use to create hierarchical designs Ports Ports are symbols that form connecting points leading into or out of the schematic page Ports provide connectivity between schematic pages
209. m of one or more lower level schematics The block displays on a schematic as a rectangle with a variable number of input and output ports You can place one or more instances of a hierarchical block on a schematic After you place a block you can stretch it reshape it and move it You can create a schematic to be represented by the block or associate an existing schematic with the block Wires and buses that end at any of the edges of the block automatically connect to the block Pins are created where these connections occur A default pin name appears within the block this pin name can be changed Creating a hierarchical block 1 Click the Draw Block button to change the pointer to a rectangle representing the block 2 Move the block to the desired location and click to place it 3 Right click to stop placing blocks The block is assigned a reference designator of HBn where n is a sequential number beginning with 1 You can change the reference designator of the block Creating and Editing Hierarchical Blocks 7 5 Changing the reference designator of the hierarchical block 1 Double click the HBn reference designator to display the Edit Reference Designator dialog box Edit Reference Designator Lx Package Reference Designator Gate y Package Type Footprint 2 Type the reference designator in the Package Reference Designator text box 3 Click OK to close the dialog box Resizing a hierarchical bl
210. matics supports standard page sizes A through E and AO through A4 It also allows you to specify a user defined page size Changing the page size 1 From the Options menu click Page Size to display the Page Size dialog box C A4 297 by 210mm B y C A3 420 by 297 mm C C 22 by 17 C A2 594 by 420 mm C D 34 by 22 C A1 841 by 594 mm C E 44 by 34 C A0 1189 by 841 mm C User Defined inches C User Defined ram User Defined Size Cancel 2 Click the appropriate button to select a pre defined page size or indicate a User Defined Size by typing the page dimensions in the Horiz and Vert text boxes Horiz in Vert in Click OK to change the page size of the currently active page and to establish the default page size for all later pages Configuring Schematics 3 23 Options Menu _ Options PERES Tools Mai Display Options 3 24 Using the Schematic Editor Note f you are using zoned borders make sure the Display check box for the Page Boundary layer in the Display Preferences dialog box is enabled see Controlling the Display in Schematics on page 3 34 Note Drawing areas for the zoned and outline border types are the same size as shown in Figure 3 1 Changing Page Settings For all page sizes you can change the border style the drawing area and the pin to pin spacing Border Style Schematics provides two border styles zoned and outline Figure 3 1 illustrates the two
211. mbol editor to create a new symbol the PART MODEL REFDES and TEMPLATE attributes are provided as a default set You can provide any other attributes as needed E 2 Attribute List Table E 1 Reserved Attributes Attribute Description See Notes COMPONENT GATE GATETYPE MODEL The name of the package definition to be used for a part If the name of the package definition is the same as the part name then the COMPONENT attribute is not necessary The gate within the package that a particular part instance is assigned to For example if a part is one of four gates in a package such as A B C D this attribute specifies which gate the part is assigned to Valid values for the GATE attribute A B C D in this example are specified as part of the package definition for the part given in the appropriate plb Package Library file Packages with only one gate do not require a gate name This terminology applies not only to digital parts but also to analog parts with multiple gates in a package When a part is placed the GATE attribute is assigned the value of the first gate defined for that part or nothing at all if there is only one gate in the package The value of the GATE attribute will be reassigned when the schematic is packaged You can edit the value of the GATE attribute to manually assign a gate by selecting Attributes from the Edit menu or double clicking the REFDES attribute See REFDES below The
212. mple R matches R1 but not R or R12 Finding a part 1 From the Edit menu select Find to display the Find dialog box Name Value E Add Criterion Additional Criteria Delete All Criteria Search What Select Curent Page Only Select All C All Pages Select Next Clear current selection Cancel 2 Specify the search criteria a Type an attribute name in the Name text box b Type the attribute value in the Value text box Cc Click Add Criterion to add the search criteria to the Additional Criteria text box d Repeat steps a through c as many times as necessary to add more search criteria Click the Current Page Only button to search only on the current page or click the All Pages button to search all pages in a multi page design 4 Click the Select All button to have all items meeting the search criteria selected or click the Select Next button to have only the next item meeting the search criteria selected 5 Click OK to begin the search The status line indicates the number of items found and selected Selecting and Moving Objects and Attributes 4 43 Cutting Copying and Pasting Schematics provides several editing features that allow you to cut copy paste copy to clipboard delete and undelete selected objects All of these functions are available under the Edit menu Most can be accessed from the keyboard The cut copy copy to clipboard and delete functions only apply when an object is select
213. n Previously opened schematics remain open until closed To close files or to close the schematic editor see Closing the Schematic Editor on page 4 70 Starting the Schematic Editor FA F Schematics 4 3 4 4 Creating and Editing Designs Simulation Checklist When you are drawing a design for simulation keep the following in mind e The symbols that you place must have corresponding simulation models associated with them e The design will need sources of stimulus e For any part that has an associated simulation model unmodeled pins are indicated by a broken pin Finding Parts Parts represent electrical devices such as resistors operational amplifiers diodes voltage sources and digital gates that comprise the circuit diagram The graphical representation of a part is a symbol stored in a symbol library For those parts with a simulation model available the model definition is stored in a model library For parts applicable to PCB layout the package definition is stored in the package library You can use symbols supplied with Schematics or you can create your own symbols and store them in user defined symbol libraries You can select a symbol from a library by name or by browsing the list of available parts The available parts are only those contained in configured libraries If you have a library of parts and they are not available you need to add the library to the list of configured libr
214. n results edit input signals and create models MicroSim PSpice amp MicroSim PSpice Basics which are circuit analysis programs that let you create simulate and test analog only circuit designs MicroSim PSpice Optimizer which is an analog performance optimization program that lets you fine tune your analog circuit designs MicroSim PLSyn which is a programmable logic synthesis program that lets you synthesize PLDs and CPLDs from a schematic or hardware description language MicroSim FPGA the interface between MicroSim Schematics and XACTstep with MicroSim PSpice A D to enter designs that include Xilinx field programmable gate array devices MicroSim Filter Designer which is a filter synthesis program that lets you design electronic frequency selective filters vi Before You Begin The following table provides a brief description of those manuals available online only This online manual Provides this MicroSim PSpice A D Online Reference Manual MicroSim Application Notes Online Manual Online Library List MicroSim PCBoards Online Reference Manual MicroSim PCBoards Autorouter Online User s Guide Reference material for PSpice A D Also included detailed descriptions of the simulation controls and analysis specifications start up option definitions and a list of device types in the analog and digital model libraries User interface commands are provided to instruct you on each of the scr
215. nal one The outline changes back to a pointer To rotate the box select it and press Ctri R See Rotating Parts on page 4 10 Note The text will automatically wrap within the box as it is entered RE Text Caption 4 52 Creating and Editing Designs To rotate the box select it and press Ctri R See Rotating Parts on page 4 10 Note The text will automatically wrap within the box as it is entered You can also double click the frame of the text box to display the Text Properties dialog box Resizing the text box 1 Select the text to display the text box handles 2 Click one of the handles and drag to resize the box to the size needed Editing text 1 Click inside the box to edit or enter more text Changing the Properties of the Text There are two ways to change text properties in Schematics e changing properties on an instance basis through the Text Properties dialog box e setting the defaults for all annotation text in the Display Preferences dialog box see Controlling the Display in Schematics on page 3 34 for further explanation Changing the text properties on an instance basis through Text Properties 1 Select the text or text box whose properties you want to change 2 From the Edit menu select Text Properties to display the Text Properties dialog box Text Properties ix Font til Browse Size 0 12 in pous mm DK Color Cancel m Frame A
216. nator schematic selection area setpoint simulation stimulus symbol Glossary 5 A name that uniquely identifies the pin on a part The physical device pin number Determines the size of the symbols as they appear on the printed page The distance between pins is set during the initial installation but may be changed Provides connectivity across schematic pages A port provides the anchor for a single pin Ports are chosen from library files placed moved and deleted in the same way as are parts Ports may have multiple connections Ports consist of three types global interface and off page defined in this Appendix A symbol that is an individual component for a specific netlister That is it is completely specified electrically for the purpose it is required to perform An attribute used as a unique name on a given schematic level For example a resistor with the reference designator R5 would indicate that it is the Sth instance of the resistor R on a particular schematic For package parts it consists of concatenation of the package s reference designator followed by the gate name assigned to the part The reference designator is used as a base for the simulation netlist Reference designators can be either automatically or manually assigned Reference designators represent a unique name used to reference a physical device Parts with the same reference designator are packaged into the same physical devic
217. nclude Simulation Information option to add simulation attributes to symbols in the library This option also converts part field data part properties on the OrCAD SDT schematic into information that can be used by the Schematics simulation netlister The default mapping between OrCAD SDT part field data and Schematics attributes is contained in the files devmap ini and orc_map txt This information is based on the standard OrCAD SDT libraries You can change or add additional parts to these files with any text editor Enable this option if you plan to simulate your designs using PSpice or PLogic If enabled the PSpice Simulation Device Types Dialog will be displayed see page A 6 Include PCB Information Select this option to create package libraries in addition to symbol libraries during translation Enable this option if you plan to netlist the schematic for layout When you enable this option the Package Types dialog box appears Importing OrCAD Files A 5 Package Types Dialog Box When you enable the Include PCB Information option in the Import OrCAD File dialog box the Package Types dialog box appears m Package Types Package Type Package Types BATTERY 0 BATTERY TO IA BDIP72 1800 m C1005 C1310 C1608 C2012 C3216 C3225 C4532 C4564 z lt lt Set Package Dre NPN TRANSFORMER To assign package types footprints and create packaging information for the parts on your sc
218. nd special symbols found in special s1b TEMPLATE The recipe for creating a netlist entry for simulation The pin names 135 specified in the TEMPLATE must match the pin names on the symbol The number and order of the pins listed in the TEMPLATE must match those appropriate for the associated model or subckt definition referenced for simulation The TEMPLATE attribute is only changeable in the symbol editor Notes 1 o These attributes are not changeable within the schematic editor These are the attributes marked by an asterisk in the Edit Attributes dialog These attributes pertain to packaging and board layout These attributes pertain to PSpice These attributes are automatically provided by Schematics when a part is placed in the schematic editor These attributes must be provided by the user when creating or modifying a symbol in the symbol editor Symbol Libraries Overview This appendix contains the contents of the symbol libraries that are provided with Schematics F 2 Symbol Libraries Using Symbol Libraries Symbols are stored in symbol libraries The symbol library files have a s1b extension and contain graphical representations and attributes of parts The contents of the symbol libraries provided with Schematics are listed in Table F 1 Parts from libraries marked with do not have corresponding simulation models Table F 1 Symbol Libraries Symbol Library File Contents Name
219. ng Annotation Graphics Hidden Pins Markers and Viewpoints Pin Names Reference Designators Stimulus Text User specified text Attribute Text Junctions Page Boundary Pin Numbers Simulation Currents Symbol Text Text Box Wires Buses Labels Part Names Ports Simulation Voltages Symbols Title and Border Controlling the Display in Schematics 3 35 Displaying or printing default properties 1 From the Options menu select Display Preferences to display the Display Preferences dialog box i Display Preferences Display Layers General Graphics Text Annotation Graphics Attribute Text Color ay Background Busses Grid M Display M Print Part Names Pin Names Simulation Currents Simulation Voltages Stimulus El Cancel Apply 2 From the Display Layers list select the appropriate display layer or layers Click the General tab Select or clear the Display check box to enable or disable display of the selected layers 5 Select or clear the Print check box to enable or disable printing of the selected layers 6 Click Apply to apply the changes and keep the dialog box displayed for further changes or click OK to apply the changes and close the dialog box Options Menu Ma Analysis Tools Ma Display Options Page Size Auto Repeat Auto Naming Editor Configuration Display Prefer To select more than one layer cons
220. ng annotation 4 13 attribute names E 1 attribute value 4 17 instance specific part values 7 17 package types A 5 pin numbers 6 42 pins 6 34 6 40 reference designator 1 14 4 21 7 4 11 7 attribute definition of Glossary 1 deleting 4 14 editing 4 12 enabling display 4 15 global editing 4 17 intrinsic property 4 12 list E 1 non changeable 4 13 selecting 4 40 simulation 8 3 SWAP 11 18 system defined 4 13 text 5 12 value 3 4 4 12 view 7 13 Attribute Editing dialog box 4 12 attribute text changing 5 12 attribute values multiple parts 4 17 attributes adding 4 14 changing display 4 14 display choices 4 15 part instance display characteristics 4 15 Attributes dialog box 5 14 6 44 auto fit 4 65 5 21 automatic panning 3 45 automatically assigning reference designators 11 9 labeling buses 4 32 labeling wires 4 32 auto naming 1 13 4 21 4 22 4 32 Auto Naming dialog box 1 13 4 21 auto repeat 1 9 4 19 4 22 4 44 6 22 Auto Repeat dialog box 4 19 autosave interval 3 32 Back Annotate dialog box 11 30 back annotation 4 13 11 29 definition of Glossary 1 base symbol 6 7 Bbox 6 29 behavioral model 7 13 bill of materials report customizing 11 14 exporting 11 16 generating 11 12 printing 11 13 bitmaps importing 4 57 6 13 block definition of Glossary 1 drawing 3 9 See also hierarchical block Block View dialog box 7 8 board layout preparing design for 11 1 border s
221. ng Schematics 3 21 Options Menu ites Analysis Tools Ma Display Options Page Size Auto Repeat Auto Naming Editor Configuration Library Settings Delete Add Local 3 22 Using the Schematic Editor Note Local libraries are first looked for in the directory where the schematic resides The repositioned library name is inserted above the selected name 9 Click OK to exit the Library Setting dialog box 10 In the Editor Configuration dialog box click OK Changing the Search Path Schematics looks for a library according to the path s specified by the Library Path in the Editor Configuration dialog box Changing the library search path 1 From the Options menu select Editor Configuration to display the Editor Configuration dialog box Editor Configuration ix Libraries mil bib Library Settings 7400 slb plb 748CT sib plb 74ALS slb plb Page Settings 7445 slb plb 74F slb plb 74H slb plb A 74HC lb plb zl Sop eton Library Path d Amsim ib s d msim Mib XBLOX d msim8s SibssC2000 Title Block Symbol ttebik Autosave interval 1710 min I Monochrome Mode Cancel 2 Type a new path or add to the existing path in the Library Path text box Specify multiple directories by separating them with a semicolon c msim lib c msim lib c project lib 3 Click OK Changing Page Size Sche
222. ng these individual gates into physical packages and reassigning reference designators and gate names to reflect how they are packaged The packager uses the package definitions for devices that are in the package libraries Package definitions contain information such as the number of gates gate names and pin number assignments Package definitions are created and maintained using the symbol editor See Specifying Part Packaging Information on page 6 34 for more information The packager assigns reference designators gates and package type attributes to parts on the schematic e The PKGREF attribute is the reference designator for the package e The GATE attribute contains the gate identifier if any e The PKGTYPE attribute contains the name of the physical package footprint to be used such as DIP14 LCC20 e The REFDES attribute is the reference designator normally displayed on the schematic It is a combination of the PKGREF and GATE attributes e For example if PKGREF U31 and GATE a the PKGREF will be U3 1a e The REFDES attribute cannot be edited directly e Tochange the REFDES change either the PKGREF or the GATE attribute The REFDES attribute will be automatically updated to reflect the change Pin numbers for devices with package definitions are determined from the package definition rather than from the symbol Packaging the Pa
223. ng with PLSyn provides an integrated environment that enables you to design Programmable Logic Devices PLDs All or any part of a schematic can be programmed into PLD parts You can define programmable logic using logic symbols such as gates and flip flops DSL Design Synthesis Language blocks or both Programmable logic symbols and DSL blocks can be placed anywhere on your schematic on any page and at any level of hierarchy Using Schematic Symbols to Define Programmable Logic Programmable logic is defined on a schematic by placing generic logic symbols such as NAND4 or JKFF or specific 74xx series symbols such as 74LS04 or 74HC107 and setting the value of their IMPL attributes to PLSyn The dig_prim slb symbol library contains over 100 ready to use programmable logic symbols Refer to the Programmable Logic Symbols section of the MicroSim PLSyn User s Guide for more detail Creating and Editing DSL Blocks Design Synthesis Language DSL blocks are hierarchical blocks that have a language based definition instead of a symbolic definition When you place a block instead of associating it with another schematic you associate a dsl file containing the procedural definition for the block Refer to the DSL Blocks and Creating a DSL Block sections of the MicroSim PLSyn User s Guide Targeting PLDs CPLDs Using PLSyn 10 3 Simulating a Programmable Logic Design from Schematics After you have entered a design tha
224. nishing Touches This example has pin numbers 1 set to display None From the Options menu select Display Options and set the grid size to 00 01 From the Graphics menu select Draw Polyline to draw the connecting lines between the diodes in the bridge and also to the tail end of the pins If necessary select Display Options from the Options menu to turn off Stay on Grid This will enable you to move graphics without being restricted to the grid Note Do not move the pins If they are not on 10 unit REI 3 4 boundaries you will not be able to connect to them when in Schematics From the Graphics menu select Draw Text to place the labels D1 through D4 on the diode symbols To change the size of the text double click the text and adjust the size The number is a percentage relative to the usual size Example Creating Symbols from Scratch 6 55 5 From the Graphics menu select Box and click once to attach the bounding box to the cursor a Move the cursor to the lower right so that the bounding box encloses the entire symbol Click again to freeze the box all pin connection points must lay on or inside of the boundary box The boundary box defines the area of the symbol in Schematics 6 From the Graphics menu select Origin and click to attach the origin to the cursor a b Move it into position Click again to drop it Setting the Attributes The last step in creating a symbol is to se
225. ns Creating Designs for Simulation and Board Layout on page 8 3 Specifying Simulation Model Libraries on page 8 5 Editing Simulation Models from Schematics on page 8 6 Editing Simulation Models from Schematics on page 8 6 8 2 Preparing Your Design for Simulation Adding and Defining Stimulus on page 8 7 Starting the Simulator on page 8 8 Viewing Results on page 8 9 Creating Designs for Simulation and Board Layout 8 3 Creating Designs for Simulation and Board Layout When creating designs for both simulation and printed circuit board layout some of the parts you use will be for simulation only for example simulation stimulus parts like voltage sources and some of the parts you use will have simulation models that only model some of the pins of the real device Those parts that are to be used for simulation but not for board layout will have a SIMULATIONONLY attribute To see an example of this double click a VDC voltage source to bring up the Attribute Editing dialog box You can add this or any attributes to your own custom symbols Specifying Part Attributes 1 Inthe symbol editor select Attributes from the Part menu to display the Attribute Editing dialog box 2 Double click the Name text box and type SIMULATIONONLY 3 Click Save Attr 4 Click OK For more information on defining attributes on part symbols Refer to Defining Part Symbol Attributes in the Creating
226. ns frame select the check box to enable printing The Content Options are described in Table 5 4 4 Select one of the Scaling options e Auto fit expands the symbol to full page size e User definable enables you to specify the zoom factor for the size of the symbol Select an Orientation Landscape or Portrait Click OK 5 22 Using the Symbol Editor Table 5 4 Content Options Option Symbol Image Attributes Symbol Data Pin Data Description specifies printing the graphics of the selected symbol specifies printing the attributes and the attribute values of the selected symbol specifies printing the description type Bbox dimensions and origin position of the selected symbol specifies printing the pin data of the selected symbol Creating and Editing Symbols Overview This chapter describes how to use the symbol editor to copy create and edit symbols which includes Creating New Symbols on page 6 3 describes the four essential methods of creating a new symbol Drawing Symbol Graphics on page 6 10 describes the assortment of drawing tools provided for creating and editing a symbol Editing Existing Symbols on page 6 20 describes the editing features for defining and editing pins and for defining and editing packaging definitions Editing Symbol Attributes on page 6 30 describes how to add and edit the properties of a symbol Using Symbol Aliases on page 6 33 describes how
227. nstances of it will have different component values For instance a lower level schematic contains a certain resistor The hierarchical block or symbol representing the lower level schematic defines the value of the resistor The following procedure shows how you can place one instance of a block and define the resistor value to be 10K and another instance and have the resistor value be 20k 1 Inthe lower level schematic double click the resistor value to display the Set Attribute Value dialog box refer to 4 29 2 In the Value text box enter RESISTORVALUE 3 Click OK 4 Save the lower level schematic 5 Place a block representing the lower level schematic on the top level or higher level schematic see Creating and Editing Hierarchical Blocks on page 7 4 6 Select the block From the Edit menu select Attributes to display the Attribute Editing dialog box refer to 4 12 8 Add an attribute called RESISTORVALUE with a value of 10k 9 Click OK 10 Place another block representing that same lower level schematic on the top level schematic When you netlist the top level schematic the two instances of the lower level schematic will have different resistor values This is due to the way that attributes are evaluated in Schematics e Schematics first searches for an attribute at the present level of the hierarchy If the attribute is not found at that level Passing Information Between Levels of Hierarc
228. ocedures used for creating and editing a hierarchical design are the same as those for creating and editing a design as explained in Chapter 4 Creating and Editing Designs This chapter has the following sections that explain the procedures that are unique to hierarchical designs Creating and Editing Hierarchical Blocks on page 7 4 describes how to create and edit hierarchical blocks placed on a schematic Creating and Editing Hierarchical Symbols on page 7 9 describes how to use the symbol editor to create hierarchical symbols Using Interface Ports on page 7 12 describes how to specify connections to lower level schematics Setting Up Multiple Views on page 7 13 describes how to set up and use alternate representations for a hierarchical block or symbol 7 2 Creating and Editing Hierarchical Designs Navigating Through Hierarchical Designs on page 7 15 describes how to move between pages in a hierarchical design Assigning Instance Specific Part Values on page 7 17 describes how to assign instance specific parts values Passing Information Between Levels of Hierarchy on page 7 18 describes how to define the parameters of hierarchical blocks and symbols without concern for how deeply their contents are nested Example Creating a Hierarchical Design on page 7 20 provides the step by step procedures for creating the top level schematic with the block symbol representing the lower level schematic and crea
229. ock 1 Select the block to display its handles 2 Click one of the handles and drag to resize the block Creating a schematic for a hierarchical block 1 Select the block HE1 I Po AAA AA A 2 From the Navigate menu select Push If the block is new the Setup Block dialog box appears The block as placed is a standard size orientation and shape You can stretch and reshape the block To rotate the block select it and press Ctri R See Rotating Parts on page 4 10 Shortaut press You can also double click the block to achieve the same results as steps 1 and 2 7 6 Creating and Editing Hierarchical Designs The Implementation frame in this dialog will only display if you are using Design Lab Note nterface input and output ports are created automatically only the first time you push into the block Thereafter you must manually add any additional interface input and output ports Set Up Block Filename Jexample sch Browse Ippe Schematic ka Implementation IV Implemented as Programmable Logic Hep Taget XILINX F Gx OK Family XC5200 E Cancel 3 Type the new schematic name 4 Click OK A new schematic displays and contains interface input and output ports corresponding to the pins connected to the block The input ports correspond to the pins connected to the left side of the block The output ports correspond to the pins connected to the ri
230. ocumentation v Related Documentation Documentation for MicroSim products is available in both hard copy and online To access an online manual instantly you can select it from the Help menu in its respective program for example access the Schematics User s Guide from the Help menu in Schematics Note The documentation you receive depends on the software configuration you have purchased The following table provides a brief description of those manuals available in both hard copy and online This manual Provides information about how to use MicroSim Schematics User s Guide MicroSim PCBoards User s Guide MicroSim PSpice A D amp Basics User s Guide MicroSim PSpice amp Basics User s Guide MicroSim PSpice Optimizer User s Guide MicroSim PLSyn User s Guide MicroSim FPGA User s Guide MicroSim Filter Designer User s Guide MicroSim Schematics which is a schematic capture front end program with a direct interface to other MicroSim programs and options MicroSim PCBoards which is a PCB layout editor that lets you specify printed circuit board structure as well as the components metal and graphics required for fabrication PSpice A D Probe the Stimulus Editor and the Parts utility which are circuit analysis programs that let you create simulate and test analog and digital circuit designs It provides examples on how to specify simulation parameters analyze simulatio
231. odel from the Edit menu and use the Edit Model dialog box to either change the model reference or to create an instance model To edit the underlying model definition of a part select Model from the Edit menu in the symbol editor not in the schematic editor The name of the part that was retrieved from the Symbol Library and 125 placed When you use Get New Part to select and place a part the PART attribute reflects the name of the part that you selected The value of this attribute will not change for instance when you change the MODEL attribute You can always see what part you placed by referring to the value of this attribute which is usually displayed on the schematic for all devices for breakout devices the MODEL attribute is the one visible on the schematic The PART attribute is only changeable in the symbol editor The Package Reference Designator If there are four gates in a package 2 4 such as A B C and D then the PKGREF for all four parts would be the same such as U1 and the GATE attribute distinguishes them such as ULIA ULB UIC U1D The PKGREF is the first component of the REFDES attribute See REFDES below The physical carrier type to be used for the part Examples DIP 14 24 LCC20 DIP8 If the package definition for the part has only one available package type defined then the PKGTYPE attribute will be assigned this value You can manually assign the package ty
232. oelectronics Inc EEPROM Filters Fujitsu Limited PROM DRAM SRAM EEPROM F W Bell Hall effect devices Goldstar Semiconductor Group ROM DRAM SRAM Using Symbol Libraries F 5 Table F 1 Symbol Libraries continued Symbol Library File Contents Name har_dig slb Harris Semiconductor Corp PROM microprocessors VART interface transceivers controllers SRAM harris slb Harris Semiconductor Corp operational hughes slb hyundai slb intel slb jbipolar slb jdiode slb jfet slb jjfet slb jopamp slb jpwrbjt slb jpwrmos slb lin_tech slb magnetic slb marker slb mepwrsys slb amplifiers MCT bridge drivers transistor arrays power MOSFET Hughes Microelectronic Center display drivers CPU SRAM Hyundai Electronic Inc Ltd PLD DRAM SRAM Intel Corp EPROM CPU math co processors microcontrollers SRAM network processors Japanese bipolar transistors Japanese diodes rectifiers Zener diodes varactors Schottky diodes Junction field effect transistors Japanese junction field effect transistors Japanese operational amplifiers Japanese power bipolar transistors Japanese power MOSFETs Linear Technology Corporation operational amplifiers Magnetic cores inductor coupling devices Probe markers this file is automatically accessed by Schematics and should not be included in the list of configured library files Micro Power Systems ADC DAC data acquisition voltage
233. of the symbol library analog s1b in the title bar of the symbol editor window Click the New File button to display a new blank symbol editor window Select Copy from the Part menu to display the Copy Part dialog box New Part Name Existing Part Name Library lt new gt Patt Select Lib Cancel Click Select Lib to display the Open dialog box Select Analog s1b from the scroll list Click Open Double click R in the Part list From the File menu select Close The prompt Save changes to part R will appear Click Yes You are prompted for a library file name 11 Type a name in the File Name text box 12 Click Save You are prompted to add the library to the list of configured libraries 13 Click Yes Repeating Part Placements If you are placing parts in line with each other and evenly spaced use the Auto Repeat function Automatically repeating part placements Before selecting the part for placement enable the Auto Repeat function and set the offset spacing 1 From the Options menu select Auto Repeat to display the Auto Repeat dialog box Select the Enable Auto Repeat check box Specify a horizontal and vertical offset for the part placements Figure 4 1 illustrates parts that are placed at various vertical and horizontal offsets Placing and Editing Parts 4 19 Auto Repeat x M Enable Auto Repeat Horizontal Offset 00 00 in Vertical Offset 00 10 in C
234. om scratch the origin is placed in the upper left corner of the bounding box You can move it to a location of your choice after creating the symbol If you change the origin of a symbol in the symbol editor thus changing the location of the symbol graphics relative to that point the symbol graphics relocate accordingly in the schematic editor whenever you edit previously created schematics Editing a part origin 1 From the Graphics menu select Origin to change the pointer to a pencil shape 2 Move the pointer to the point on the object where you want to place the origin and double click to fix the origin at that point Defining and Editing Pin Types 6 29 Bounding Box The bounding box is the rectangular dotted line surrounding the symbol When you click a part from within the schematic editor the area in which you can click and have that part be selected is defined by the bounding box of the symbol Resizing the bounding box 1 From the Graphics menu select Bbox to change the pointer to a pencil shape Click to begin sizing the bounding box Move the pointer down and to the right A dotted box outline follows the pointer 4 Click at the location of the lower right corner of the bounding box All pins must be contained within the bounding box for proper connections to be made in the schematic editor Hidden pins like those found on digital parts do not have to be and in most cases are not contained with
235. on file Resistors and capacitors as a special case When creating user defined attributes in the component description file resistors and capacitors are a special case Because different valued resistors and capacitors and other components with a value attribute do not have unique manufacturing IDs a VALUE entry must immediately precede the corresponding set of entries containing user defined properties for a given device Commas must not be used between attributes Each set of component attributes must have a unique manufacturing ID To display the attribute it must be listed in the Reports Setup under the File menu 11 16 Preparing Your Design for Board Layout Setup Setup The COST entries for 10K and 1K resistors would appear in the component description file as follows R RC05 R1 VALUE 10K R RC05 R1 COST 05 R RC05 R2 VALUE 1K R RC05 R2 COST 03 Specifying user defined component attribute descriptions 1 From the File menu select Reports to display the Reports dialog box shown on 11 13 2 Click Setup to display the Report Setup dialog box shown on 11 14 3 In the Component Description File text box enter the name of the user defined file that you want to use Click OK In the Reports dialog box click OK Exporting to a Spreadsheet or Database Program The report can be created in a database format so you can use the report in a spreadsheet program Specifying the format of the B
236. oned Border Default Metric Parameters o 3 25 Attribute Text Characteristics o o e e 4 16 Symbol Editor Toolbar Buttons o e e 5 8 Symbol Editor Function KeyS s lt e sas e rea soma ana e o 5 11 Display Characteristics soros cona 05 e a Sad a Pe E a wo 5 13 ContentOpuons s 4245 44 685 de ete bee SEH OS OSG BHR OS 5 22 Distinctions Between Connectors and Ports 04 11 3 Trace Properties Attnibutes s poce a Gok a tuce acea opni ede Ge do e 11 19 Component Location Attributes o 2000048 11 20 Supported Layout Packages and File Formats 11 24 ESE File Format s e e eroe a Sieg oda e A eae RR we aE C 5 Reserved Attributes qs 200 3 ens eee a de es we oe GE Be E 2 Symbol Libraries 2 4 0 4 oo amp a DO Ba Bade eee we Gere F 2 Before You Begin Welcome to MicroSim Welcome to the MicroSim family of products Whichever programs you have purchased we are confident that you will find they meet your circuit design needs They provide an easy to use integrated environment for creating simulating and analyzing your circuit designs from start to finish Before You Begin MicroSim Schematics Overview MicroSim Schematics is a schematic capture front end program with a direct interface to other MicroSim programs and options All in one environment you can do the following using Schematics design and draw
237. onfigure Layout Editor selection from the Tools menu 2 From the Tools menu select Package to package the schematic and assign distinct reference designators 3 Define any special trace width trace clearance for nets or placement attributes for parts 4 Generate a Bill of Materials report and check that the package types are correct for the parts 5 Create a layout netlist using the Create Layout Netlist selection from the Tools menu 6 From the Tools menu select Run PCBoards to start MicroSim PCBoards Note The Run PCBoards menu item only appears on the Tools menu if you have MicroSim PCBoards as the configured layout editor 11 20 Preparing Your Design for Board Layout 2 Click the Edit Attributes button to display the Attribute Editing dialog box 3 Type one of the attribute names listed in Table 11 2 in the Name text box 4 Inthe value text box type the width clearance or padstack value Click Save Attr 6 Click OK Specifying Component Locations You can specify the position and orientation to use in the layout for parts on the schematic Do this by adding one or more of the attributes shown in Table 11 3 to the parts Table 11 3 Component Location Attributes Attribute Description COMP_LAYER Name of the PCBoards layer representing the surface that the component is to be positioned on By default Solder is the bottom surface and Component is the top surface COMP_X X axis coordin
238. orkspace Design Manager views a file s top level folder as seen in Windows Explorer as a workspace and assigns it the name of the top level folder Although workspaces are actual folders categories are not Categories only display files found after Design Manager searches the top level folder and its sub folders making it easy for you to identify and manage them Dependent files such as hierarchical sub schematic and symbol library files that are stored outside the workspace show a reference to their location You can copy and move all files or a selected sub set from one workspace to another workspace This principle applies to deleting files as well Because categories are for display purposes only you cannot move or copy files from one category type to another category type Design Manager also provides cut copy paste and delete operations at an individual file level that work similar to the same functions in Windows Explorer When files are copied moved or saved to a workspace Design Manager automatically arranges their display into the appropriate file type categories Windows Explorer when opened or refreshed reflects the action taken in the workspace Note To get the optimal use of Design Manager it is recommended that only files related to one design be stored in one top level folder and therefore in one workspace Also because Design Manager can perform operations on a design file and all of its dependent
239. out netlist Examples DIODE DIODE PART 2N2220 2N2221 2N2222 TRNPN 1N914 1N915 AKO DIODE The first example is a replacement string rule This says that the string DIODE is to be replaced by the string DIODE PART The second example shows how more than one identifier can reference the same replacement string The third example shows an AKO specification In this case the string 1N914 references the DIODE rule This is areplacement that is not another AKO so the net result is that Schematics will replace 1N914 by DIODE PART A target identifier may end with the character to indicate a match with a pattern containing the same leading characters up to the For example Lcc matches LCC20 LCC28 etc Rules are tested in the order found in the file A default rule specified anywhere in the file will be used when no matching pattern is found Rules can be empty that is a line may consist of a pattern or patterns only Interfacing to Other Board Layout Products 11 27 Parts List Mapping xmp After Schematics has found a matching rule in the map file for the COMPONENT Or PART attribute of a part it further processes the replacement string This processing is similar to the processing of the TEMPLATE attribute of a part when a simulation netlist is created Identifiers in the string prefixed by one of the characters 2 and are treated as part attribute names A simple e
240. pe by editing or creating this attribute or you may have the PKGTYPE attribute assigned during packaging The Reference Designator of a part The value of the REFDES attribute 1234 1s a combination of the Package Reference Designator PKGREF and 5 the gate GATE attributes For example if your PKGREF is Ul and your GATE is A then your REFDES will be UIA and will appear as such on your schematic The REFDES cannot be edited directly in the schematic editor You must edit the PKGREF or the GATE or both attributes instead When you double click the REFDES of a part within the schematic editor the dialog that appears has two edit controls one for the Package Reference Designator and one for the Gate E 4 Attribute List Attribute Description See Notes The REFDES of a part is defined in the symbol editor The default REFDES is U In the schematic editor the portion of the REFDES is replaced by a number when the part is placed on the schematic or when you select Annotate from the Tools menu The number assigned gives each part instance a unique reference designator within a level of hierarchy SIMULATION Tf present this attribute indicates that the part only has meaning for 25 ONLY simulation There will be a netlist entry for parts with this attribute but no layout netlist entry The SIMULATIONONLY attribute identifies parts such as voltage and current sources breakout devices found in breakout s1b a
241. port all symbols in the current symbol library e Select any of the entries in the Symbols dialog box to export a specific set of symbols e Select the Selected Area Only check box to export the currently highlighted selection in the symbol editing area 3 Click OK to display the Export File Specification dialog box shown on page B 3 4 Enter the export file name and format and click OK to begin exporting Library Expansion and Compression Utility Overview This Appendix explains the Library and Expansion Compression Utility that can be used with the Schematics libraries In this chapter you will find the following sections Using the Library Utility on page C 2 Expanding Library Definitions into Text Files on page C 3 Compressing Definition Files into a Library on page C 3 Salvaging a Corrupted File on page C 4 Reorganizing a Library File on page C 4 C 2 Library Expansion and Compression Utility Using the Library Utility MicroSim Schematics and MicroSim PCBoards include a library utility LXCWin that works with the symbol package and footprint libraries You can use LXCWin to e expand a library into definitions and create a list of those definitions 1st file e compress definitions listed in the 1st file into a library e salvage corrupted library files e reorganize library files To activate LXCWin 1 From the Windows Start menu point to Programs point to the MicroS
242. r Attribute Text z M Changeable in schematic Orient horizontal gt I Keep relative rotation Hiust fer Viust roma gt Size roo DK Cancel In the Name text box type the name of the attribute Optionally type in the default value in the Value text box By default the attribute Value only displays on the symbol To disable any display select None in the What to Display frame By default the attribute value can be changed in the schematic editor on an instance by instance basis To prevent changes to the attribute value clear the Changeable In Schematic check box to disable this function By default attributes that are displayed do not have their text rotated if the symbol is rotated on the schematic to make it more readable To have it rotate with the symbol select the Keep relative rotation check box Click Save Attr Click OK 6 31 6 32 Creating and Editing Symbols Editing a displayed attribute eS 1 Double click the displayed attribute To edit an undisplayed attribute or to make multiple changes click the Edit Attributes button on the toolbar Using Symbol Aliases 6 33 Using Symbol Aliases A symbol has a name It can also have one or more aliases associated with it Aliases are alternative names that the device represented by the part are known by For example you can have a symbol named 74AC269 which has as one of its aliases HD74AC269P When defining an alias keep in min
243. r oO Cancel The Simulate Command frame shows the path that Note The Simulate Schematics uses to run PSpice A D Command frame will show either PSpice or PSpiceAD depending on the package that you have purchased If 4 Similarly to change any of the other command lines click you are using a network to select the command in the Other Commands list box and licensed version that has both type a new path name in the Command text box PSpice and PSpice A D available you can choose which simulator you want to 6 Inthe Editor Configuration dialog box click OK use 3 To change the path name type a new path name in the Command text box 5 Click OK to exit the App Settings dialog box Changing the configuration file A configuration file other than the default msim ini file can To change the configuration file be used for any of the MicroSim programs that Schematics for Schematics interfaces with 1 In the Windows Program Manager select the 1 From the Options menu select Editor Configuration to Saa Schematics icon display the Editor Configuration dialog box shown on 3 39 2 Select Properties from the File menu 2 Click App Settings to display the App Settings dialog box eet 3 Append i lt configuration file shown on 3 39 name gt to the Command Line 3 In the Configuration File frame select Other 4 Click OK 3 40 Using the Schematic Editor App Settings Configuration File If not specif
244. r observing voltage current or digital signal levels or waveform behavior when the circuit is analyzed A character string generated by an application describing some kind of condition status or other information and displayed by the Message Viewer An underlying description of the electrical behavior of a part using a set of variable parameters Used by PSpice The initialization file usually contained in the Windows directory containing start up and configuration information for MicroSim programs including Schematics The process of moving between pages in a multi sheet schematic or between levels in a hierarchical design A set of electrically connected part pins A net may be anonymous or named An anonymous net might be the junction of two resistors A named net could be a wire labeled CLOCK connecting two digital parts Glossary 4 netlist nodeset off page port origin package package library definition package type package type class page part part description part instance part outline pin pin definition A list providing the circuit definition and connectivity information in simulation netlist format A symbol containing one or two pins permitting you to initialize a node voltage for simulation A port connecting pages of a schematic Off page ports may or may not contain a LABEL attribute The point on a symbol designated for placing a part When a symbol is rotated on the schematic
245. r own To add to the list of commonly used package type names that are presented use the Configure Package Types selection from the Packaging menu Also use this selection to configure package types into the package classes that are used when you package a design When you package a design you can assign priorities to use when deciding which package type to assign to devices that are available in more than one type For example all DIP package types DIP8 DIP14 and so on are assigned to the DIP class You can indicate that you want to use DIP package types whenever possible Or you might change the priorities to assign SMT package types if possible Adding a package type 1 From the Packaging menu select Configure Package Types to display the Configure Package Types dialog box Configure Package Types Class oir Edit Classes Package Types o pa Add elete CE Cancel 2 Inthe Package Types text box type in the new package type name 3 Inthe Class list select one of the existing classes for the new package type If you need to create a class do the following a Click Edit Classes b Type in the name of the new class in the Package Class text box c Click Add Specifying Part Packaging Information 6 47 d Click OK 4 Click Add 5 Click OK 6 48 Creating and Editing Symbols Configuring Custom Libraries When you create a library whether it is a library of symbols or a library of pac
246. r window from the Window menu When you are finished with the symbol editor close the symbol editor window by clicking the Close button in the upper right corner or select Close from the File menu Starting Automatically If you are going to use the symbol editor more than the schematic editor you can have the symbol editor start automatically when you start Schematics Add the sym option to the Command Line in the Windows Program Item Properties dialog box for the Schematics icon For example C MSIM psched exe sym Symbol Editor Window When you start the symbol editor the symbol editor window displays I MicroSim Schematics Symbol Editor lt new gt lt new gt Fie Edit Graphics Part Packaging View Options Window Help 218 x osla seele Salolle alo o sl 1 63 115 Autosaving complete Cine y Note You can only open one symbol editor window at a time and you can only edit one symbol at a time Refreshing the Screen To clean up and refresh the screen click the Redraw button on the toolbar Menus There are a series of menus from which you can select the function you want to perform The display and operation of the menus and submenus follow the standard Windows layout and operation Symbol Editor Window 5 7 5 8 Using the Symbol Editor Schematics provides different menus for the schematic editor and for the symbol editor The menus change as you change active windows
247. rawing the bus 3 Click at each vertex of the bus Double click at the end of the bus F 4273 e 4 Type 74273 in the Get Recent Part list box on the toolbar 5 Press Enter lt 4 Move the outline pointer to the location of U1 and double click to place a single instance of the 74273 part Drawing the first wire segment connecting the part to the bus 1 Click the Draw Wire button 2 Move the pencil shaped pointer to a point on the bus where wire segment A 0 attaches to the bus Click to start drawing the wire 3 Move to pin D1 on U1 and double click Using Auto Repeat to create the remaining wire segments 1 Enable Auto Repeat see Automatically repeating part placements on page 4 19 2 Set the horizontal offset to 00 00 and the vertical offset to 00 10 3 Press Space seven times to draw seven additional wire segments Using Auto Naming to quickly label the wire segments 1 From the Options menu select Auto Naming to display the Auto Naming dialog box 2 In the Wire Port Labels frame select the Enable Auto Increment check box Type A 0 in the Label Template text box Click OK Select the first wire to be labeled From the Edit menu select Label to label the wire N O oO fF W To label each of the remaining wire segments a Select the wire b Press Space Placing and Editing Parts 4 23 R Reference Designators V Enable Auto Naming Starting Designator No fi Wire Port Labels
248. re outlined in the What You Need to Know to Run Probe section of the Waveform Analysis chapter in your PSpice user s guide Using Markers You can place markers on your schematic to indicate the points that in Probe where you want to see waveforms displayed For more information on markers refer to the Schematic Markers section of the Waveform Analysis chapter in your PSpice user s guide Viewing Results 8 9 View Probe Help for more information View Schematics Help for more information 8 10 Preparing Your Design for Simulation Configuring Probe Display of Simulation Results To configure what Probe displays when it is started select Probe Setup from the Analysis menu You are given the following choices e Restore Last Probe Session This restores the display characteristics from the last session of Probe e Show All Markers This displays the waveforms at the points on the schematic that have been marked by markers e Show Selected Markers This displays the waveforms only for those points on the schematic where the markers have been selected e None This displays a blank Probe window ready for you to select the traces that you want to add Using Design Journal Overview This chapter provides introductory information about the Design Journal In this chapter you will find the following sections Understanding Design Journal on page 9 2 describes the purpose and different uses of Design Journal
249. reconfigure libraries from global to local default file 3 18 Using the Schematic Editor Options Menu Ms Analysis Tools Ma Display Options Page Size Auto Repeat Auto Naming Editor Configuration Library Settings User Defined Symbol Libraries You can create global and local symbol libraries and add them to the default directory or to another directory of your choice Once created you can perform all the same actions as listed in Default Library Directory on page 3 17 Note When adding a symbol library to the library search list placement in the list is important If more than one library contains the same symbol name Schematics uses only the first one it encounters If you add local library names to the library search list Schematics places them before global library names because they are searched first You can control their placement within a group of local library names but you cannot integrate them into the global names Adding a library 1 From the Options menu select Editor Configuration to display the Editor Configuration dialog box Editor Configuration 7400 sb plo 744C slb plb Library Settings 74ACT slb plb 74AL5 slb plb Page Settings l 7485 slb plb 74F slb plb 74H slb plb 74HC slb plb y App Settings Library Path d Amsim8Alib d Amsim84 SlibSBLOX d msim8 AlibeC
250. references dialog box see Controlling the Display in Schematics on page 3 34 for further explanation Changing the graphics properties on an instance basis through Graphics Properties 1 Select one or more objects whose properties you want to change 2 From the Edit menu select Graphics Properties to display the Graphics Properties dialog box Graphics Properties Lx Color a Width Style Fill CA Using defaults for layer Symbols Cancel Restore Defaults 3 Select the appropriate properties for the objects selected 4 Click OK ni O An arrow will display when you drag the pointer over a handle to indicate that it may be resized You can also double click the object or group of objects to display the Graphics Properties dialog box If you decide you don t want to apply the changes you have made click the Restore Defaults button to restore the settings selected in the Display Preferences dialog box The Restore Defaults button works at any time before closing the dialog box or after re entering it 4 56 Creating and Editing Designs Display Layers Annotation Graph Markers and viewpoints Page Boundary Part Names Pin Names Pin Numbers Simulation Currents Simulation voltages Shirl zi Note Changes made in the Display Preferences dialog box become the default settings for all schematics but may be changed at any time Setting the default graphi
251. responding to one of the gate types specified in the package definition Example For the 10102NOR symbol GATETYPE 1 gates A B C for the 10102ORNOR symbol GATETYPE 2 gate D Click Save Attr Click OK to exit the dialog box In the procedure for specifying information for multi gate components see Specifying Information for Multi gate Components on page 6 41 define the different gate types comprising the package Example Type 1 is the NOR gate and type 2 is the ORNOR gate 10 For each gate type define the gates and the pin assignments for each gate see Specifying Information for Multi gate Components on page 6 41 The pin assignments define the pin numbers for each gate that correspond to each pin name Deleting a Package Definition Use the Remove function to delete one or more package definitions from the library Packaging Menu e a View Options Windo Deleting a package definition 1 From the Packaging menu select Remove to display the Remove Package Definition dialog box 2 Typethe name of the package to be deleted or click to select a package from the list ame rT Click Delete to delete the selected item sie Click Close 6 46 Creating and Editing Symbols Configuring Package Types When you create package definitions and specify package types for a device you can pick from a list of commonly used package type names or enter one of you
252. rface to the schematic editor This section describes the uses of menus the toolbar and toolbar buttons the status line and the keyboard Configuring Schematics on page 3 15 provides information on configuring the schematic editor to suit your requirements Controlling the Display in Schematics on page 3 34 describes how to control the display and printing of layers of your schematic in addition to specifying colors and sizes 3 2 Using the Schematic Editor Zooming and Panning in Schematics on page 3 42 tells how to zoom in and out of the drawing refresh the screen display pan to various sections of the drawing and fit the drawing to the page Using the Message Viewer on page 3 47 describes the Message Viewer that displays system messages and explains the various displays and controls Components of a Design A schematic consists of e symbols e attributes e wires e buses e text items Schematics can have either a flat or hierarchical structure depending on the way you decide to implement your design Parts Parts are electrical devices that make up a circuit such as e resistors e operational amplifiers e diodes e voltage sources e digital gates The graphical representation of a part is a symbol Symbols are stored in symbol libraries Components of a Design 3 3 Schematics uses two basic types of parts primitive and hierarchical Primitive parts are at the lowest level and explicit
253. rner in position click to anchor it in place 7 Select the diode symbols and move them to their approximate locations inside of the box Placing Pins To place pins 1 From the Graphics menu select Place Pins 2 To place the pins a Place the IN and IN pins as shown in Figure 6 2 You can rotate graphics by selecting Rotate from the Edit menu The cursor can still be used to select menu commands even when in the process of placing a graphic If you make a mistake lt Shift click and hold the right mouse button to select and drag the box corner to a new location 6 54 Creating and Editing Symbols You can also click the pin to 3 change the name To disable or modify the way the pin numbers are displayed 1 Double click the pin 2 In the Change Pin box click Edit Attributes 4 3 Inthe Attributes box select pin lt number gt 4 Under What to Display click the option you want 5 Click Save Attr b Press Ctri R to rotate the pin that is attached to the cursor c Place the OUT and OUT pins as shown in Figure 6 2 Double click the default name pin1 through pin 4 of each pin to change their names to the following IN IN OUT OUT Single click the names or numbers to move them to their appropriate position Keep in mind that the X on the pin is the point where the wires will connect and Schematics will expect to find the connection points on the 00 10 grid 6 Click OK Fi
254. rowser dialog box see 7 21 Enter M2N 6804 in the Part text box Click Place amp Close Press Ctrl R Ctrl R and Cirl F to rotate the symbol twice and flip it once so that the source and bulk pins appear at the top To verify M1 see Figure 7 2 on page 7 24 5 Move the part symbol to the desired location of M1 and click to place the part Shortcut press Double clicking the block gives the same results as steps 1 and 2 You are presented with a new schematic containing one interface input port and one interface output port They represent the block you drew on the top level schematic If you had connected more pins to the block more interface ports would appear after pushing into the lower level schematic 7 26 Creating and Editing Hierarchical Designs a Right click to stop placing parts 7 Click the Get New Part button to display the Part Browser dialog box see 7 21 Enter M2N6802 in the Part text box 9 Click Place amp Close 10 Move the part symbol to the desired location of M2 and click to place the part 11 Right click to stop placing parts If you want to clean up your schematic click each of the MOSFET device names M2N6804 and M2N6802 and move them slightly so that the label does not overlap on one of the pins Drawing the voltage source and specifying the DC voltage attribute 1 Click the Get New Part button to display the Part Browser dialog box see 7 21
255. rsor and Y M Stay on Grid grid A check mark in the check box indicates that the text grid is Grid Spacing 00 10 in Gravity 00 03 in ON M Text Stay On Grid Spacing 00 02 in Cancel Type the text grid spacing value in the Spacing text box Click OK 5 20 Using the Symbol Editor Zooming and Panning The zoom and pan features in the symbol editor are the same as they are in the schematic editor Refer to Zooming and Panning in Schematics on page 3 42 Printing Symbols Printing a symbol 1 From the File menu select Print to display the Print dialog box Current Printer HP Laserjet 45i 4SiMx PS on LPT1 M Current Symbol Only Select All Parts V Symbol Image IV Symbol Data Cancel IV Attributes IV Pin Data Printing Symbols 5 21 File Menu EN exit Draw Navigate New Open Close Import Export Save Save As Checkpoint 10104 Content Options X Scaling Auto fit one symbol per printer page Page Setup User definable zoom factor 200 Printer Setup Orientation Printer Select Landscape Portrait 2 To select the part or parts to be printed do the following a Select the Current Symbol Only check box to print the symbol being edited b Select one or more parts from the Parts list Cc Click Select All Parts to print all parts in the open library 3 Inthe Content Optio
256. rts being replaced applied to the replacement parts select the Keep Attribute Values check box Click OK All of the selected parts are replaced Replacing all parts of the same name 1 From the Edit menu select Replace to display the Replace Part dialog box In the Target Part text box type the name of the parts to be replaced In the Replacement text box type the name of the replacement parts If you want the attribute values of the parts being replaced applied to the replacement parts select the Keep Attribute Values check box Click the Current Page Only option button to replace all target parts on the current schematic page or click the All Pages option button to replace all target parts on all pages of a multi page design Click OK All of the named target parts are replaced Placing and Editing Parts 4 25 Replace Part xi Target Part Replacement T Keep Attribute Values C Selected Parts Onl Current Page Only C All Pages Cancel 4 26 Creating and Editing Designs Placing and editing power and ground symbols is the same as placing and editing other part symbols with the following considerations e Power and ground symbols are contained in the port slb symbol library e You can use the symbol editor to create your own custom power and ground symbols The power and ground symbols contained in port slb library and available for placing on a schematic ar
257. rts in Your Design 11 7 e Pin numbers are dependent on the gate for multi gate parts and package type for devices with alternative pin assignments based on package type Until both GATE and PKGTYPE attributes are assigned values no pin numbers are shown e For single gate packages with no gate name for example blank instead of A no GATE attribute value is required e The pin number visibility and location information from the symbol is used to determine if and where the pin numbers from the package definition are to be shown on the schematic e Ifa device has no package definition then the pin number information is determined by the symbol definition Assigning Reference Designators Manually Assigning reference designator 1 Double click the displayed reference designator to display the Edit Reference Designator dialog box Edit Reference Designator Lx Package Reference Designator Gate Py Package Type Footprint Cancel 2 Type a new value in the Package Reference Designator text box 3 Click OK 11 8 Preparing Your Design for Board Layout If you have other parts that you want to automatically package together use the All Except User Assigned option when you package the design Automatically packaging at a later time Tools Menu 1 From the Tools menu select Package to display the Package Markers Window Help dialog box Package m Function r Package Class Priorities
258. s Connecting a signal between pages 1 Place an off page port OF FPAGE on one schematic page JOFFPAGE sy 2 Connect a labeled wire or a bus signal to the off page port 3 Repeat steps 1 and 2 using the same signal name on the other schematic pages 4 62 Creating and Editing Designs Viewing Multiple Pages To view pages in a multi page design use the Previous Page Next Page and Select Page selections under the Navigate menu Viewing the previous page 1 From the Navigate menu select Previous Page Viewing the next page 1 From the Navigate menu select Next Page Viewing a particular page 1 From the Navigate menu select the Select Page option Select Page E 2 Double click the desired page number and title Page Title 3 Click OK Viewing multiple pages at the same time 1 From the Windows menu select New 2 From the Navigate menu select Previous Page Next Page or Select Page Cutting Copying and Pasting Between Pages Cutting and pasting or copying from one page to another in a multi page design is done in almost the same manner as on a single sheet design See Cutting Copying and Pasting on page 4 43 Cut or copy the object 2 Navigate to the page where the object is to be placed see Viewing Multiple Pages on page 4 62 3 Paste the object Creating and Editing Multi sheet Designs 4 63 Deleting a Page To delete a page from a multi page design use Delete Page under the Navig
259. s is controlled by labeling The rules of connectivity are e Abus label specifies the signals it carries and the order of the signals e A bus can connect to another bus only if one is a subset of the other such as A 0 31 and A 16 31 e Abus electrically connects to a pin of a part or port if the pin name indicates the same number of signals Connection is in the order specified for example a bus labeled A 31 0 connected to a port labeled Addr 32 63 will electrically connect A 31 with Addr 32 A 30 with Addr 33 and so on e Fora wire to be connected to a bus the wire must be labeled with one of the signals on the bus e Valid syntax for labeling a bus is CLK 0 15 CLK 0 15 CLK O0 15 CLK 0 3 12 15 CLK1 CLK2 datal data2 input In the latter form each and every signal in the bus must be included in the series The signals are separated by commas Using Wires and Buses 4 31 Drawing a bus 1 Click the Draw Bus button to change the pointer to a pencil in shape Click to start the bus Click at each vertex of the bus Right click to end the bus and change the pencil back to a pointer Labeling a bus 1 Double click the bus segment to display the Set Attribute Value dialog box see 4 29 Type the label in the LABEL text box Click OK Editing a bus label 1 Double click the bus or the label to display the Set Attribute Value dialog box see 4 29 and the existing label in the LABEL text
260. s that Represent the Entire Connector 11 4 Using Connector Symbols that Represent One Pin of aConnector 11 4 Creating Single Pin Connector Symbols 11 5 Packaging the Parts in Your Desig s es cris rr gcr e 11 6 Assigning Reference Designators Manually 11 7 Assigning Reference Designators Automatically 11 9 Setting Package Class Priorities 02 00004 11 10 Generating a Bill of Materials Report o o 11 12 Printing and Saving the Report o s se co ce aaeain ere 11 13 Customizing the Format of the Report o o 11 14 User Defined Component Information 11 15 Exporting to a Spreadsheet or Database Program 11 16 SWappime PMSs oc e ba Ghee SG eG ee dee eh ee 11 18 Interfacing with MicroSim PCBoards 04 11 19 Specifying Trace Properties s s ecs Gad hie doe Sa Sook wae i 11 19 Specifying Component Locations 2 2004 11 20 Cross ProDINE n s io Boke ea Do Gods ake GR Gos Batons 11 21 Applying Backward ECOS o 00000 eee 11 22 Applying Forward ECOS sacacasa eee 11 23 Interfacing to Other Board Layout Products 11 24 Layout Mapping Files o o o 11 25 Common SydtaX ose cba e aaa a TER O aS 11 26 Parts List Mapping Xp vos 264 684 e200 00 a 11 27 Back Annotations s is ce 4606848444654 4444484 A 11 29 Appendi
261. s to and displays as 0 10 inches for US standard page sizes and 2 5 millimeters for metric page sizes The minimum grid spacing allowed is 0 01 inch or 25 millimeters Specifying grid spacing 1 From the Options menu select Display Options r0 H Y Snap to Grid M Cursor and Y M Stay on Grid 2 In the Grid Spacing text box type the grid spacing value 3 Click OK lara Spacing 00 10 in Gravity 00 03 in M Text Stay On Grid Spacing 00 02 in Cancel Gravity The gravity setting determines how close the pointer must be to an object for the object to be selected when you click the pointer The default is 03 inches or 75mm 5 18 Using the Symbol Editor Specifying gravity 1 From the Options menu select Display Options Gravity is only functional when 2 Inthe Gravity text box type the snap to pin gravity value to pin led snap to pin is enabled 3 Click OK Changing Grid and Gravity 5 19 Text Grid Text Grid allows you to set the grid spacing for text separately from the normal grid spacing The text grid is usually set to some smaller percentage of the regular drawing grid This allows you to align text along smaller increments of the regular grid Enabling text grid and specifying text grid size 1 From the Options menu select Display Options r Options 2 Select the Text Stay on Grid check box to enable the text M aidon A ti M Cu
262. s to create new pages copy pages from other schematics delete pages and give each page a title Adding a Page to a Design There are two ways to add additional pages to your schematic 1 creating a new page or 2 copying a page from the current schematic or another schematic Creating a new page 1 From the Navigate menu select Create Page to display the Create Page dialog box Type a title for the new page in the Page Title text box You can accept the next sequential number as the page number for the new page or type in a different number 4 Click OK to add the new page Creating and Editing Multi sheet Designs 4 61 Copying a page 1 From the Navigate menu select Copy Page to display the Navigate Menu Copy Page dialog box View Options Analysis Neat Pa Schematic Name example3 sch Select Page Path c msim examples Create Page Directory Schematic File Page Delete Page J j examplel sch anasim example2 sch digsim a Cancel Select the schematic file from the Directory list Select a page number if the page to be copied is part of a multi page schematic 4 Click OK to add the page to the current schematic after the current page and renumber all further pages Creating Connections Between Pages Use off page ports to create connections between pages Off page ports can either be labeled or unlabeled If an off page port is unlabeled it must be connected to a labeled wire or bu
263. sections Using Schematics on page 1 2 provides a broad overview and describes various functions Example Drawing a Schematic on page 1 4 provides a step by step example of creating a schematic 1 2 Getting Started Using Schematics Schematics is a schematic capture front end program that provides a convenient system for e creating and managing circuit drawings e setting up and running simulations e evaluating simulation results using MicroSim Probe e creating netlists for MicroSim PCBoards and other external PCB layout packages An important prerequisite to building a schematic is availability of proper symbols for assembly Schematics has extensive symbol libraries and a fully integrated symbol editor for creating your own symbols or modifying existing symbols The main functions of Schematics are e creating and editing designs e creating and editing symbols e creating and editing hierarchical designs e preparing a design for simulation e preparing a design for board layout These primary functions are described in the following chapters Using Schematics 1 3 MicroSim packages PCBoards footprints package definitions Ee symbols layout ECO file symbol f definitions eles back packaging annotation information models MicroSim Probe Ee Ee i netlist amp simulation circuit directives Bill of M
264. selected items Edit Attributes E 2 Globally edit attributes of all selected items i No Cancel 3 Click Yes to display the Global Edit Attributes dialog box Global Edit Attributes Lx Attribute Name Value 4 Inthe Attribute Name text box type the name of the attribute In the Value text box type a value for the attribute 6 Click OK The named attribute is changed to the specified value for all selected parts having that attribute Placing and Editing Parts 4 17 Note Click Browse to view a list of attributes for the selected items If the value of an attribute is the same for all selected items the value appears Otherwise no value appears 4 18 Creating and Editing Designs Part Menu Symbol Wizard Save any custom symbol changes that you make in your own custom library If you save symbol changes within the MicroSim libraries your changes will be overwritten when you install a new version of the software Editing the Default Attributes of a Symbol When placing parts you might want to change the value of an attribute for all parts of a certain type such as a resistor For example you might want to change the default value for all resistors being placed from a value of 1 Kohm to 10 Kohm Changing the default value of a resistor 1 2 O ON O 0 Select a resistor symbol on the schematic Click the Edit Symbol button to display the resistor symbol in the symbol editor window Note the name
265. ser s guide more information 8 8 Preparing Your Design for Simulation z Setting Up Analyses Refer to your PSpice user s guide for information about setting up and running the many different analysis types supported by PSpice A D Starting the Simulator You can start the simulator directly from Schematics by clicking on the Simulate button on the toolbar or selecting Simulate from the Analysis menu For more information refer to the Starting Simulation section of the Setting Up Analyses and Starting Simulation chapter in your PSpice user s guide Viewing Results You can use Probe to view and perform waveform analysis of the simulation results For more information refer to the Waveform Analysis chapter of your PSpice user s guide Viewing Bias Point Results After simulating you can display bias point information on your schematic so that you can quickly zero in on problem areas of your design PSpice A D calculates and saves the bias point voltages and currents By default Schematics reads all of this information and displays voltages for every net in your schematic currents on pins are not visible but are available For more information refer to the Viewing Results on the Schematic chapter in your PSpice user s guide Viewing Results as You Simulate You can configure Probe to run automatically when the simulation has finished or to monitor waveforms as the simulation progresses These procedures a
266. simulation model if the component can be simulated with PSpice A D Symbols Symbols are created and modified with the symbol editor and are stored in symbol libraries slb Symbols consist of graphics pins for electrical symbols and attributes Packaging Information Packaging information for a component is closely related to the symbol but is kept separately in a package definition Package definitions are stored in package libraries plb The association of the symbol and the packaging definition is by name Generally you will create a symbol with a given name and a package definition with the same name If you use the Symbol Creation Wizard in Schematics to create symbols it will automatically create a package definition for you 5 4 Using the Symbol Editor Package definitions are created and modified with the Schematics symbol editor They are also used and can be created and modified in the MicroSim PCBoards PCB layout editor Footprints The footprint for a component is the definition of its mechanical outline pad pattern identifiers and physical extent boundary The package definition for a symbol defines the names of the footprints package types in which it is available For each footprint the package definition defines the physical pin number assignments for the pins When a symbol is placed on a schematic the PKGTYPE attribute defines the name of the footprint to be used in the layout Footprints th
267. styles 1 2 3 3 I 4 designa b Drawin Margin sed NA zoned B m are outline Figure 3 1 Border Styles You can configure a zoned border for all decimal and metric page sizes including custom sizes see Changing the border style on page 3 26 The following table lists the default decimal page sizes and their configurations Configuring Schematics 3 25 Table 3 6 Zoned Border Default Decimal Parameters Type Dimension Vertical Horizontal Zones Margin Zones Margin A 8 5 x 11 2 29 2 38 B 11x17 2 62 4 38 C 17 x22 4 5 4 75 D 22 x 34 4 1 0 8 ka E 34 x 44 8 5 8 1 0 in inches The following table lists the default metric page sizes and their configurations Table 3 7 Zoned Border Default Metric Parameters Type Dimension Vertical Horizontal Zones Margin Zones Margin A4 210 x 297 2 6 35 2 9 65 A3 297 x 420 2 15 75 4 9 65 A2 420 x 594 4 12 7 4 19 5 Al 594 x 841 4 25 4 8 12 7 AO 841 x 1189 8 12 7 8 25 4 Not in millimeters e If your design doesn t require a zoned border Outline Border will display the page with fewer details 3 26 Using the Schematic Editor Options Menu Analysis Tools Ma Display Options Page Size Auto Repeat Auto Naming Editor Configuration Changing the border style You can specify which border style to use through the Editor Confi
268. t Enterprises All other company product names are trademarks registered trademarks of their respective holders Copyright Notice Except as permitted under the United States Copyright Act of 1976 no part of this publication may be reproduced or distributed in any form or by any means or stored in a data base or retrieval system without the prior written permission of MicroSim Corporation As described in the license agreement you are permitted to run one copy of the MicroSim software on one computer at a time Unauthorized duplication of the software or documentation is prohibited by law Corporate Program Licensing and multiple copy discounts are available Technical Support Internet Tech Support microsim com Phone 714 837 0790 FAX 714 455 0554 WWW http www microsim com Customer Service Internet Sales MicroSim com Phone 714 770 3022 Contents Chapter 1 Chapter 2 Before You Begin Welcome to MicroSim 44846 4 2442284 e 0A BREE RAR RE ES 1 MicroSim Schematics Overview 2 0 eee ee ii How to Use this G ides s ks piis m es Se Hew aek amp eH D E ac eek iv Typographical Conventions e a aa a E e iv Related Documentation ooo a e 000 ee ee ees v Onlme Help 0 e ek ros ROR e a Rea BR oh Me E N vi What s New for Release 8 2 6605 6 4 ne et ew Sok we SE Soe a BBs R vii Getting Started OVERVIEW 2 dos Si So oars Oe bees AW Se Bars Bae Ge Gas 1 1 Using Schematics 0 44 2 dd w
269. t be changed or deleted in the schematic editor because the attribute was made an intrinsic property when the symbol was created These attributes can only be modified in the symbol editor The letter a indicates that the attribute has been annotated as a result of back annotation or has been assigned by the packager Any changes you make to the part attributes are made to the individual part instance you selected The original part contained in the symbol library remains unchanged Attribute names can contain any alphanumeric characters A Z 0 9 and the underscore character Attributes cannot be self referencing The two check boxes at the bottom of the Edit Attribute dialog box enable you to control whether or not non changeable or system defined attributes are included in the display System defined attributes have reserved attribute names Schematics uses these attributes for specific purposes primarily during netlisting and packaging See Appendix E Attribute List for a complete list and explanations of attributes System defined attributes are as follows BIASVALUE PAGESIZE COMPONENT PAGETITLE COLOR PART ERC PKGREF FAMILY PKGTYPE FLOAT PLMODEL GATE PROBEVAR GATETYPE REFDES IMPL SIMULATIONONLY LABEL SOURCE MARKERTYPE STIMTYPE MODEL STIMULUS NODE SWAP PAGECOUNT TAG PAGENO TEMPLATE Placing and Editing Parts 4 13 4 14 Creating and Editing Designs Save Attr Note You cannot delete non changeable or syst
270. t in categories that show the relationships of the files to one another For instance all Schematics sch files are listed in the Design Entry Files category while all simulation dat and out files are listed in the Simulation Results category Hierarchical schematics are shown as child schematics to the parents Understanding Design Manager 2 3 MicroSim Design Manager MyDesign olx ts File Edit Workspace View Window Help 18 x ja le eje lal SJ Workspace MyDesign files viewed by category De Design Entry Files El ASCH SUBA1 SCH SUBA2 5CH ALIB SLB B SCH SUBB1 SCH SUBB2 SCH T CSCH DSYN DSL SUBA1 SCH SUBSUBA1 SCH Ef SUBA2SCH SUBB1 SCH Ef SUBB2SCH SUBC1 SCH SUBC2 SCH Che PCB Layout Files Che PCB Layout Results Che Simulation Inputs De Simulation Results E ADAT Z AQU Z B DAT Z BOUT Che Optimizer Files Che Signal Integrity Files Che PLSyn Files Che System Files Chg Intermediate T emporary Files Pr User Files E aoc 2 JUNK TMP 2 README TXT For Help press F1 2 4 Using Design Manager Multiple workspaces in their own windows can be open simultaneously for browsing and file management activities Because categories are for display purposes only you cannot move or copy files from one category type to another category type Managing Your Files in the W
271. t includes programmable logic you may simulate it at any time both before and after you have chosen a physical implementation You can specify the simulation parameters by selecting Setup from the Analysis menu For additional details refer to the Setting up and Starting Simulations section of the MicroSim PLSyn User s Guide Using PLSyn After you have described your design in Schematics use PLSyn to create the physical implementation of your programmable logic To start PLSyn from Schematics select Run PLSyn from the Tools menu Note This command only appears if you have PLSyn installed Refer to the Physical Implementation chapter in the MicroSim PLSyn User s Guide Updating the Schematic with the PLDs After you have created a physical implementation from the programmable logic symbols and DSL blocks on the schematic the PLDs can be back annotated from PLSyn to the schematic Then you can generate a netlist for PCB layout Refer to the Updating the Schematic chapter in the MicroSim PLSyn User s Guide 10 4 Targeting Your Design for Programmable Logic Targeting Xilinx FPGAs MicroSim FPGA Field Programmable Gate Array is also available for use with MicroSim Schematics and MicroSim PSpice A D which enables you to enter designs for FPGA digital devices The design you enter with Schematics can be a mixed design that incorporates an FPGA device with other components entered with Schematics or it can be
272. t one of the scaling options See Scaling on page 4 65 Select an Orientation of either Landscape or Portrait Most schematics are in landscape format Landscape is the schematic editor default format 5 Click OK Scaling Scaling options allow you to control the size of the printout Auto Fit Auto fit scales the size of the page to print one schematic page per sheet of printer paper For example if the schematic page set through the Page Size selection in the Options menu is B size and your printer paper is A size Auto fit automatically sets a zoom factor of 50 so that the B size drawing fits on the A size paper as Example 1 of Figure 4 10 shows If the orientation is set to Portrait as in Example 2 the zoom factor would be automatically set to a smaller percentage to fit the entire schematic on the page 4 66 Creating and Editing Designs In Landscape A size _ A size EXAMPLE 1 B size p A size Schematic Page Printed Paper In Portrait B size m A size EXAMPLE 2 Schematic Page Printed Paper Figure 4 10 Printing with Auto Fit Enabled User Definable Zoom Factor User definable zoom factor allows you to set a custom zoom factor For example with the zoom factor set at 100 a B size schematic will print on two A size sheets of paper when the printer is configured in portrait mode as shown in Figure 4 11 B size A size A size
273. t up the attributes so the symbol can be used for simulation 1 From the Part menu select Attributes to display the following attributes in the Attributes dialog box b REFDES PART MODEL TEMPLATE Click REDES and set its value to U This is the reference designator that appears in your schematic and in the netlist Click Save Attr 2 Click PART a b Set its value to the name that you used in the original definition box Click Save Attr If you click anywhere within the area of the boundary box in Schematics the symbol will be selected The origin is the point the symbol will rotate around when in Schematics Usually it is on the hot spot of the top left pin but it is not required You can also set it to BRIDGE 6 56 Creating and Editing Symbols MODEL and TEMPLATE are only required if you are going to simulate Notice that the names used match the pin NAME as defined on the pins in the symbol the ORDER of the pins in the TEMPLATE are listed in the same ORDER as those in the subcircuit Looking at the symbol on page one note that IN is the same as node 1 in the subcircuit definition 3 Click MODEL a Set its value to the same value as in your model or subcircuit definition b Click Save Attr 4 Click TEMPLATE The TEMPLATE attribute is the template for generating the netlist entry for this device The TEMPLATE for this example looks
274. t you get will have the basic symbol name It will not have the name you type therefore it will effect your Bill of Materials Generating a Bill of Materials Report A Bill of Materials report lists the quantities of each component type used in the design along with corresponding reference designators You can also include information such as values for part instance attributes VALUE and TOLERANCE and user defined attributes contained in a component description file Figure 11 3 is an example of a Bill of Materials report generated for the PCBEX schematic shipped with your MicroSim programs The only optional attribute chosen for display is the part instance VALUE attribute Bill of Materials Lx Item Count MfalD Attributes RefDes mA ae 74500 74LS04 74Ls10 7415240 U5 UB U7 US u9 U10 U11 u12 74L5323 11 U2 U3 U4 74L5373 U13 U14 U15 U16 74586 u20 EDGE62 P1 R R1 Figure 11 3 Bill of Materials Report Generating a Bill of Materials Report 11 13 Generating a Bill of Materials report File Menu 1 Select Reports from the File menu to display the Reports Edit Draw Navigate View Optio New dialog box nee Close Import Export Bill of Materials Report E E Save Ctrl S Print Save As ae Checkpoint Print Save As Print Setup Edit Library ose Symbolize 2 Click Display The Bill of Materials dialog box appears and you can print display or save t
275. te menu select Push to display the Set Up Block dialog box Set Up Block ix Filename Jexample sch Browse Ippe Schematic X Implementation gt IV Implemented as Programmable Logic _ Hop Target kus E Eamil XC5200 Cancel 4 Inthe Filename text box enter the name of the existing schematic to be associated with this block 5 Click OK When you associate an existing schematic with a new block pins will be automatically created on the block for each interface port on the sub schematic Creating and Editing Hierarchical Symbols 7 9 Creating and Editing Hierarchical Symbols Schematics uses two basic types of symbols primitive and hierarchical Primitive symbols are low level symbols that explicitly contain all of the information required by the netlister They can be modified by editing their graphics pins and attribute lists in the symbol editor Hierarchical symbols have the same appearance as primitive symbols in Schematics They contain one or more levels of schematics inside them while primitive symbols do not They can also be modified by pushing into them from within the schematic editor or symbol editor and editing the associated schematics Creating a Hierarchical Symbol The Symbolize function automatically creates a symbol to represent a schematic The symbol editor is then used to modify any portion of the resulting symbol graphics pins and attributes When preparing a schem
276. ted by PADS CADSTAR Tango Protel SCICARDS 11 30 Preparing Your Design for Board Layout Using back annotation Tools Menu 1 Markers Window Help Package Create Layout Netlist Run PCBoards Back Annotate From the Tools menu select Back Annotate to display the Back Annotate dialog box Back Annotate Lx ECO File Name C msim example bco Browse ECO File Format PCBOARDS z Cancel Type the name of the ECO file generated by the layout package in the ECO File Name text box Select an ECO file format from the ECO File Format list Click OK In step 2 if you don t know the file name click Browse and select a file using the standard open file dialog box Importing OrCAD SDT Schematics This appendix provides information regarding importing OrCAD SDT files In this chapter you will find the following sections Importing OrCAD Files on page A 2 Differences between OrCAD SDT and Schematics on page A 9 A 2 Importing OrCAD SDT Schematics Importing OrCAD Files A schematic created with OrCAD SDT can be loaded into Schematics for editing The schematic and any symbols it uses are translated from the OrCAD SDT format into the Schematics format This is a one way process You can also translate individual OrCAD SDT libraries with this command When translating OrCAD SDT schematics Schematics uses the OrCAD SDT configuration file sdt cfg to determine which OrCAD SDT symbol
277. teristics Instructions for setting text characteristics are included in the previous chapter See Changing Text Characteristics on page 5 12 3 Click OK Picture You can import bitmap bmp dib Windows metafiles wmf or enhanced metafiles emf into a symbol while working in the symbol editor Importing a graphic 1 From the Graphics menu select Insert Picture to display the Open dialog box See Importing Bitmaps and Metafiles on page 4 57 for further instruction regarding importing bitmaps and metafiles Drawing Symbol Graphics 6 13 Text Caption Text This Object Orient horizontal y Di OK Hiust left X y Cancel Viust normal bd Size foo 6 14 Creating and Editing Symbols Selecting Selecting an element of a drawing 1 Click to select the element The object color the default is set in the Display Preferences dialog box indicates it is selected 2 Move or edit the object as necessary Selecting a new object causes any previously selected items to be unselected 100124 Selecting more than one element selection rectangle 1 Hold down while selecting the elements The selected elements change color Selecting all elements within a given area of the drawing 1 Select the area by dragging the pointer across the desired area A selection rectangle appears to indicate the selection boundary Only items entirely contained within the boundary are selected
278. tinct schematic net names into the same PCB net name shorting the two together Defining a hidden pin 1 Double click the pin to display the Change Pin dialog box 2 Select the Hidden check box 3 In the Net text box type the name of the net to which the hidden pin is to be connected 4 Click OK If you set the visibility off you must supply the name of a connecting net typically a global net like G_DPWR or G_DGND for the pin in the Net text box A You can also select the pin and select Change from the Edit menu When you place the part on a schematic you can change the power or ground net to which the part is connected by changing the value of the attribute 6 28 Creating and Editing Symbols Graphics Menu Part Packaging Are Box Circle Polyline Pin Text Insert Picture BBox Changing Symbol Origin and Bounding Box The origin is designated for placing a part and is the point the part is rotated around By default the origin is at 0 0 It is maintained as a point of reference on the schematic The bounding box defines the selection area of the symbol when placed on a schematic After drawing a symbol all of the elements of the symbol must be enclosed in the bounding box Origin By default part symbols in the symbol libraries have the origin on the point of connection on the upper left pin You can move the origin to any point on the symbol Note When creating a symbol fr
279. ting 6 6 global port 4 26 hierarchical 7 9 library 3 16 4 4 6 5 F 1 placing 4 9 port 3 4 primitive 7 9 printing 5 21 stopping placement 4 9 wiring 7 23 symbol aliases 6 33 symbol attribute COMPONENT E 2 GATE E 2 GATETYPE E 2 MODEL E 2 PART E 3 PKGREF E 3 PKGTYPE E 3 REFDES E 3 SIMULATION ONLY E 4 TEMPLATE E 4 symbol editor automatically starting 5 6 closing 5 6 creating annotation symbols 4 58 exporting B 4 importing graphics 6 13 part attributes 8 3 rotating and flipping 6 17 selecting an area 6 14 shape filling 6 15 starting 5 5 window 5 7 symbol graphics drawing 6 10 symbol libraries 6 48 browsing 4 8 loading 6 20 making available in Schematics 6 48 table of F 2 See also library Symbol Wizard 6 3 Symbol Wizard dialog box 6 4 symbolize 7 9 definition of Glossary 6 symbolizing a schematic 7 10 symbols annotation 4 58 Symbols Export dialog box B 4 syntax bus labeling 4 30 T TangoPro layout format 11 24 targeting parts for programmable logic 10 2 text adding to a symbol 6 12 attribute 5 12 characteristics 5 12 drawing 3 12 free standing 5 15 grid 3 32 5 19 moving 1 15 text box drawing 4 50 editing text within 4 51 resizing 4 51 text grid enabling 5 19 text properties changing 4 52 changing in display preferences 4 53 changing on instance basis 4 52 text wrap 4 51 4 52 title bar 5 10 title block changing attributes 4
280. ting the lower level schematic Hierarchical Design Methods You can create a hierarchical drawing in either of two ways e Create a block and later assign a schematic to the block top down method e Create a schematic and turn it into a symbol to be used in a higher level design bottom up method Top down method By creating one or more blocks and wiring them together you can establish a functional block diagram The block diagram can be used as a top level sketch for your design After you have mapped out the block circuitry you can push into each block and start drawing a new schematic or assign an existing schematic to the block You can also set the view that each schematic will represent such as a PCB or a transistor Bottom up method If you already have a schematic that you would like to use in larger designs you can create a hierarchical symbol to represent the schematic The hierarchical symbol can then be electrically connected in another design Hierarchical Design Methods 7 3 Hierarchical design is a useful way to structure large projects especially those starting from a block diagram and those with multiple occurrences of common circuitry Use the method of design that best fits your design needs for each circuit you create 7 4 Creating and Editing Hierarchical Designs Creating and Editing Hierarchical Blocks A hierarchical block represents a collection of circuitry in the for
281. titleblk Name Value Revision fi 001 1a Save Attr Revision 1 001 13 Ch Dispi PageTitle Example Schematic Hange SRA PageND 1 Delete PageCount 1 PageSize User CompanyName MicroSim Corporation Line1 20 Fairbanks a IV Include Non changeable Attributes OK IV Include System defined Attributes Cancel In the attribute list double click the attribute Type the information in the Value text box Click Save Attr Select another attribute or click OK You can also double click the title block to display the Attribute Editing dialog box 4 48 Creating and Editing Designs Editing one attribute of the title block 1 Double click the attribute of the title block to display the Set Attribute Value dialog box Set Attribute Value x VALUE Cancel Type or correct the information in the text box Click OK Creating a Custom Title Block Because the title block is treated as a symbol you can use the symbol editor to create your own custom title block or edit the existing title block to suit your requirements See Chapter 6 Creating and Editing Symbols Instead of creating a title block each time you start a new schematic you can copy the TITLEBLK symbol from the special slb symbol library to your own custom symbol library and modify it to suit your needs You must configure your custom symbol library into the library search list for your custom title block symbol to be available for use
282. to Pin Spacin ss 24 eae ga oe Foe Be a es t 3 29 Changing Grid and Gravity o o e 3 29 Gd OD esa do rs ds e e 3 29 Stay On Grid ee m9 rra ee 3 30 Snap t0 Gnid 6 3 4 04 65 ode to og HAH Re Dl Oe Re 3 30 Sapo PN ica aa E ob A A SOG es 3 31 Contents v Grid Spacing Sak pea SRSA a PRES Ow wg eRe eS eo 3 31 Gravity sra Se Rd EM eR Ew 3 31 TextGhd 2444540458296 8004 ADA AA 3 32 Setting the Autosave Interval o o 3 32 Controlling the Display in Schematics o o 3 34 Changing Fonts ss acs rra a Sk aaa 3 36 Contisurine Colors eos ago a o a ha 3 37 Changing Application Settings o e e 3 38 Changing the Get Recent Part LISUSIZE rra d a 3 41 Zooming and Panning in Schematics o o 3 42 LOMO ibi ds ake Hae is dl Be 3 42 Setting Zoom Parameters po eo s creacar eaea cira o o 3 43 Fitting toa Page ss on oe aa a we SS a Ee RS Oe 3 44 Panini sas og Gade Gide Se ee Ore A OS BH 9S Sw OG Gre 3 44 Automatic Panne sco te 445544 0568 So oo aoe BG a es 3 45 Using the Message Viewer 0 000002 eee aid ps 3 47 Online Help 0 4 5 42 2 4 hoo wo whe a Sw a dw ee wh ees 3 48 Locating the Source of a Message oo soco ee srete eee tu 3 48 Indicated Severity rog ea eo SG SR ee ERG wd oR SS we oO 3 48 Additional Information s do o 4 bare Gow ae Bod Sw Swale 3 49 Closing the Message Viewer o 0000000
283. to display the Pan amp Zoom dialog box Pan amp Zoom E Zoom Scale Factor 1 20 e 5 o Cancel Auto Pan M Enable Hot Zone Size 1 Sensitivity 1000 ms Pan Coarse Delta 75 Fine Delta 10 In the Scale Factor text box type a value This value defines the factor by which the screen is magnified or reduced when you select Zoom In or Zoom Out A Scale Factor of 2 will double or halve the size of objects viewed In the Fit text box type a value This value defines the percentage of the work space to be filled with the complete schematic when you select View or press Ctrl N Options Menu ies Analysis Tools Ma Display Options Page Size Auto Repeat Auto Naming Editor Configuration 3 44 Using the Schematic Editor or press Ctrl N View Menu MES Options Analysis Tools Fit Ctri N In Ctrl Out Ctrl O Area Ctrl Entire Page Redraw Ctrl Pan New Center Fit Type a decimal value between 50 and 100 A typical value is 90 4 Click OK Fitting to a Page All of the parts wires and text within the active window excluding the title block are displayed by fitting the view to the page Fitting the view to the page 1 Click the Zoom to Fit Page button or select Fit from the View menu Panning Panning allows you to select a new window centering point The current zoom scale remains the same When you select the new c
284. to give a symbol an alternate name Specifying Part Packaging Information on page 6 34 describes procedures for defining packaging information 6 2 Creating and Editing Symbols Configuring Custom Libraries on page 6 48 describes the procedure for making a custom library available in Schematics Creating New Symbols Following are the four methods for creating a new symbol 1 Using the Symbol Wizard e Use the wizard to create symbols from scratch The wizard guides you through the steps for creating a symbol and also creates packaging information for the symbol e Use the wizard to create symbols automatically for existing models 2 Making a copy of an existing symbol under another name and modifying the copy 3 Importing a symbol definition exported by another Schematics user 4 Creating an A Kind Of AKO symbol which is a reference of any existing symbol Using the Symbol Wizard The Symbol Wizard helps you to create new symbols Following are some of the features and benefits of using the Symbol Wizard e eases the creation of symbols by guiding you through each step of the process e provides simple point and click dialog boxes e provides feedback as you make decisions e avoids using complicated mouse or keyboard interactions e enables you to navigate through the symbol creation process by backing up to repeat a step and moving forward When you start the Symbol Wizard you are taken through a pro
285. to specify a particular capacitor type for example CAP CRO8 5G from the PADS library the designer places an instance of a capacitor and then sets the COMPONENT attribute to CAP CRO8 5G The following rule in the xpk file will support this CAP component componentll partl value tolerancel tolerancel This tells Schematics to use the value of the COMPONENT attribute if that is set or else to use the value of the PART attribute This is followed by the value required and tolerance optional Note The general form of the rule will work for all similar types of capacitors such as CAP CR20 3G etc 2 TTL Devices In this case a rule is needed that passes the COMPONENT or PART attribute such as 74LS04 through to the Part list appending a package specifier for chip carrier devices This xmp rule will work 74 component component part amp pkg_type This outputs the value of COMPONENT or PART then tests the PKGTYPE attribute to see if it is defined If so its value is applied to the set of rules defined in the xpk file The translated value is then output Consider handling package types such as DIP14 and DIP16 LCC20 and LCC28 DIP packages and the Partlist item must have no suffix in other words a DIP version of a 74LS04 is just a 74LS04 The chip carrier packages must have the suffix Ccc Interfacing to Other Board Layout Products 11 29 The following rules in the xpk file w
286. ts two and three Ordering Drawing Objects When you draw or paste an object in the symbol editor Schematics places it in front of all other objects on the page or in a graphics frame If the object is filled it can obscure other objects You can control how objects overlap by putting them in front or in back of other objects Moving objects in back of other objects 1 Select the object you want to place behind another object 2 From the Edit menu select Send to Back which will place the object behind the other object Moving objects in front of other objects 1 Select the object you want to place in front of another object 2 From the Edit menu select Bring to Front which will place the object in front of the other object Rotating and Flipping Elements In the symbol editor you can rotate and flip mirror elements currently being drawn elements already drawn and entire areas of a drawing A rotated element is rotated 90 counter clockwise A flipped element is mirrored about the Y axis Rotating and flipping must occur during one of the following e while dragging before placement e after placement Rotating Elements Rotating an element before placing it 1 Select an element to be placed 2 Press Ctrl R to rotate it while still in the drag mode The image rotates 90 counter clockwise Each time you press Ctrl R the image will rotate 90 counter clockwise Rotating an already placed element 1 Sel
287. tyle changing 3 26 outline 3 27 setting 3 24 zoned 3 27 bounding box 6 29 definition of Glossary 2 box drawing 6 11 browse attributes 4 17 browser library 1 8 1 16 4 8 part 1 8 1 16 4 6 browsing symbol libraries 4 8 bundle definition of Glossary 2 bus definition of Glossary 2 drawing 1 12 3 9 4 30 4 31 labeling 1 12 4 30 4 31 4 32 orthogonal 4 33 placing 4 22 selecting 4 40 splitting 4 31 bus label editing 4 31 buttons Draw Wire 7 23 C CADSTAR layout format 11 24 Change Attribute dialog box 4 15 5 12 Change Pin dialog box 5 14 6 24 7 7 7 23 Change Text dialog box 5 15 6 13 changing a placed pin type 6 24 application settings 3 38 attribute text 5 12 attribute value 4 17 border style 3 26 bounding box size 6 29 custom libraries 4 18 default value 4 18 display characteristics of attributes 4 15 drawing area 3 28 free standing text 5 15 graphics properties 4 55 4 56 gravity 3 29 grid 3 29 hierarchical block reference designator 7 5 library search order 3 21 page title 4 46 part values 1 14 pin name text 5 14 pin names on blocks 7 23 pin number text 5 14 pin numbers 6 25 reference designators 1 14 search path 3 22 text characteristics 5 12 text properties 4 52 4 53 value of attribute 4 12 changing properties on instance basis 4 52 4 55 checking library configuration 1 7 part has simulation model defined 8 5
288. u are using is stored elsewhere the full path must be entered 3 20 Using the Schematic Editor When removing a library name it is only removed from the configured libraries list The library is not deleted Options Menu Ms Analysis Tools Ma Display Options Page Size Auto Repeat Auto Naming Library Settings Removing Library Names If you no longer need a library name in the list of configured libraries you can remove it from the list of configured libraries Removing a library name 1 From the Options menu select Editor Configuration to display the Editor Configuration dialog box shown on 3 18 Click Library Settings to display the Library Settings dialog box shown on 3 19 In the list of libraries select the library name that you want to remove The selected library name is displayed in the Library Name text box Click Delete Click OK to exit the Library Settings dialog box In the Editor Configuration dialog box click OK Correcting Library Names If you type a library name incorrectly you can change the name as it appears in the list of configured libraries Correcting a library name 1 From the Options menu select Editor Configuration to display the Editor Configuration dialog box shown on 3 18 Click Library Settings to display the Library Settings dialog box shown on 3 19 In the list of libraries select the library that you want to change The nam
289. und symbols Using Wires and Buses on page 4 28 describes drawing and labeling wires and buses in addition to describing the drawing options that affect the placement of wires and buses 4 2 Creating and Editing Designs Using Ports on page 4 38 describes the use of off page and global ports Selecting and Moving Objects and Attributes on page 4 40 describes how to select and move parts wires and attributes Creating and Editing Title Blocks on page 4 46 describes how to create and edit the title block on your schematic Adding Non Electrical Information on page 4 50 describes how to create and edit annotation items non electrical information Creating and Editing Multi sheet Designs on page 4 60 describes how to create and edit multi sheet designs Printing Your Design on page 4 64 describes how to print your design Closing the Schematic Editor on page 4 70 describes how to save a schematic and how to close the schematic editor Starting the Schematic Editor Start the schematic editor by double clicking on the Schematics icon in the MicroSim program group An empty schematic page appears If you already have Schematics running with another schematic open click the New File button to start a new schematic Opening a File To open a new file click the New File button An empty schematic page appears To open an existing file and display the schematic for editing click the Open File butto
290. ve up to the next higher level without saving changes Moving to the top in a hierarchy 1 From the Navigate menu select Top The top level schematic appears in the active window Shortaut press Double clicking the hierarchical block or symbol gives the same results as steps 1 and 2 Shortcut press Navigate Menu View Options Analysis avigate Select Page Create Page Delete Page Copy Page Edit Page Info Edit Schematic Instance v Edit Schematic Definition Pop F3 7 16 Creating and Editing Hierarchical Designs Finding where active schematic fits in a hierarchy Navigate Menu 1 From the Navigate menu select Where to display the Where View Options Analysis dialog box Navigate Select Page Create Page Delete Page Current Schematic C msim BACKUP cmas sch Copy Page Hierarchy Path CMOSINV Edit Page Info Levels Pushed Into Edit Schematic Instance C msim BACKUP thomos sch Edit Schematic Definition Push F2 Pop F3 Top 5 The dialog box shows where the open schematic fits in the hierarchy of the open design 2 Click OK Assigning Instance Specific Part Values 7 17 Assigning Instance Specific Part Values The Edit Schematic Instance function enables you to view and edit the instance specific attributes associated with the instance of the block or hierarchical symbol that you pushed into You can only add change or delete attributes when this
291. visible pin connection points In terms of the schematic editor the position of the bounding box determines whether a point falls on a part when selecting parts or whether it falls on the pin of a part when checking for electrical connections Box defines the selection area of the symbol when placed on a schematic A collection of named wires or buses of the same type or purpose A collection of homogeneously named signals A configuration of electrically connected components or devices A physical device that is used for external connections to a circuit board A connector has no electrical significance until it is connected on a PCB Displays the bias point current flow in a given direction A schematic drawing or set of drawings representing a circuit or PCB A portion of the initialization file that specifies which schematic items are turned on and off for display and printing Engineering change order A design change usually requiring back annotation of the schematic Electrical rules check a process performed before generating a netlist or running the simulator The ERC performs a preliminary connectivity check on the schematic If the schematic is part of a hierarchical design the check is performed only for the current hierarchical level The set of files required to perform a certain function A flat single level schematic containing only primitive symbols from the component libraries A flat schematic can be either sing
292. w will display when you drag the pointer over a handle to indicate that it may be resized 6 20 Creating and Editing Symbols Editing Existing Symbols To edit an existing symbol you must first load the library that the symbol is stored in After the symbol is loaded it can be edited by using all of the common editing functions that are available To edit packaging information for a symbol see Editing a Package Definition on page 6 37 Accessing Symbols Loading a symbol library 1 Click the File Open button on the toolbar 2 Type a library name in the Open dialog box 3 Click OK Selecting a part for editing T 1 From the Part menu select Get to display the Get dialog dl box Get Part Name 7400 AKO 00 7401 AKO 01 7402 AKO 02 7403 AKO 03 7404 AKO 04 7405 AKO 05 7406 AKO 06 7407 AKO 07 z Cancel Select a part from the list Click Edit Cutting Copying and Pasting The symbol editor has editing functions to cut copy paste repeat delete and undelete selected objects These functions are available under the Edit menu or can be accessed with keyboard shortcuts The cut copy and delete functions apply only to selected objects See Selecting on page 6 14 to learn how to select single and multiple objects as well as objects within a given area Cutting Cut deletes the selected object or group of objects from the drawing and copies it to a buffer for use with the
293. x Cancel Select one of the option buttons in the What to Display frame With many attributes such as the package reference and reference designator only the value displays With others such as package type neither the name nor the value displays Click OK to close the Change Attribute dialog box In the Attribute Editing dialog box click OK Changing other display characteristics of the attributes of a part instance 1 Double click the part to display the Attribute Editing dialog box see 4 12 Select the attribute whose display characteristics you want to change Click Change Display to display the Change Attribute dialog box The name of the attribute and the current attribute value are displayed Placing and Editing Parts 4 15 Change Display Your choices are Display the value of the attribute only Display the name of the attribute only Display both the name and the value of the attribute Display both the name and value of the attribute only if the attribute is defined Display neither the name nor the attribute Change Display 4 16 Creating and Editing Designs 4 Select or type a value for any of the Display Characteristics You can change any of the characteristics as described in Table 4 1 5 Click OK to close the Change Attribute dialog box 6 Click OK to close the Attribute Editing dialog box This procedure only changes the display characteristics for the attribut
294. x Almporting OrCAD SDT Schematics OVENI EW a Se Ss bk hb be Arie e Eee Drew eave ra be ara A 1 Importing OrCAD Piles so renea e a a E od EE od we A 2 Import OPOS 2 4 65 2246 ms rs da A e AA A 4 Include Simulation Information 004 A 4 Include PCB Information A 4 xii Contents Package Types Dialog Box PSpice Simulation Device Types Dialog Box Translating Multi Page Schematics Translating Hierarchical Schematics Translating Large Designs TORLSIZS e e oa Pk a E Connecting Signal Via Labels Differences between OrCAD SDT and Sch maties siea wa gone ee da ge aoa h Appendix BExporting DXF Files OVEIVIEW 226 44 2 OGRE GEG SREARG CEA EROS Exporting DXF Files o Exporting from the Schematic Editor Exporting in the Symbol Editor Appendix CLibrary Expansion and Compression Utility OVEIVIEW s ooe e ar aom aleun a Oe OD Using the Library Utility como bea ea Expanding Library Definitions into Text Files Compressing Definition Files into a Library Salvaging a Corrupted File Reorganizing a Library File st Ele Formate ma aia y a ara Base Running LXCWin Using Command Line Options Appendix DAdvanced Netlisting Configuration Items OVERVIEW iia co pe e Wie a i Specifying PSpice Node Name Netlisting Pre
295. xample would be a string such as PART this is replaced by the value of the PART attribute An error occurs if the PART attribute is not defined When the backquote character precedes a or character it acts as a modifier It causes the mapped value of an attribute looked up in the xpk file to be used instead of the attribute value itself For example PKG would be replaced by the value of the PKG attribute mapped by any matching rule in the xpk file Examples 1 Capacitors We need to be able to provide for a generic capacitor where the designer has not provided any information beyond the capacitor s value and possibly a tolerance and also for a more specialized capacitor where the designer supplies the exact package type as well as the component value and tolerance To support the simple case a rule of the following form will be required in the xpk file CAP CAP Ovalue tolerancel tolerancel C AKO CAP These rules will match a part with a COMPONENT or PART attribute with a value of CAP or C They will produce entries in the Part list like 11 28 Preparing Your Design for Board Layout C101 CAP 10uF or C102 CAP 10uF 20 depending on whether or not a TOLERANCE attribute has been specified The VALUE attribute must be defined Schematics will issue a message if a capacitor has no assigned value To support the case where the designer wishes
296. xt box Click OK current library Creating a new symbol in a different library 1 2 Type the name of the library sIb where the symbol is to be From the Part menu select Save to Library saved Creating New Symbols 6 5 Part Menu Packaging View Options Symbol Wizard New Copy If there is packaging information associated with the symbol use the Copy selection from the Packaging menu to similarly copy the package definition 6 6 Creating and Editing Symbols Importing a symbol definition Import enables you to import a symbol that has been previously exported see Exporting a symbol on page 6 6 and incorporate it into a symbol library file Importing a symbol Port ion 1 From the Part menu select Import to display the Import Packaging View Options dialog box Symbol Wizard Hew port E Copy Get Cul G File Name RENE Remove Part Name Save to Library c msim lib Attributes Definition Ctrl D Pin List Ctrl P Get Symbol Graphics Export Import 2 Inthe File Name text box type the name of the file to be imported or select the file name from the file selection list 3 In the Part Name text box type the name to be given to the imported symbol 4 Click OK Exporting a symbol Export allows you to write a symbol definition from the open symbol library to a text file enabling you to transfer symbols from one library to
297. xt stay on grid Options Display Options F5 Orthogonal Options Display Options F6 Stay on grid Options Display Options F7 Auto increment Options Auto Naming F8 Auto repeat Options Auto Repeat F9 Rubberbanding Options Display Options F10 View errors warnings File View and messages Messages F11 Start the simulator Analysis Simulate F12 Start MicroSim Probe Analysis Run Probe Configuring Schematics 3 15 Configuring Schematics The following list summarizes the different types of options you can configure in Schematics Customizing configurable options allows you to use Schematics in the way that best suits your needs and requirements Library settings e changes the set of configured symbol libraries Page settings e sets the page size for your schematic e specifies other page settings such as paper size pin spacing and borders Display options and preferences e changes the grid and gravity settings of the schematic editor e sets the time interval between automatic saves of your schematics e changes the font used for displaying and printing text on your schematics e determines which elements of a schematic are to be displayed and printed e changes the colors used for drawing and displaying objects Application settings e specifies the number of items in the Get Recent Part list box on the toolbar e changes where to find the exe files for MicroSim programs that interface with Schemati
298. ying between pages 4 62 package definition 6 36 page 4 61 part 4 18 selected object 6 21 symbol 6 5 to clipboard 4 45 Create Page dialog box 4 60 creating AKO symbol 6 9 annotation items 4 50 annotation symbols 4 58 base symbol 6 7 connections between pages 4 61 connector symbols 11 5 custom title block 4 48 design 1 2 design for board layout 8 3 design for simulation 8 3 DSL blocks 10 2 ground symbol 4 27 hierarchical block 7 4 hierarchical design 1 2 7 20 hierarchical symbols 7 9 interface ports 7 6 multiple gate components 6 44 multi sheet designs 4 60 new attribute 4 12 new page 4 60 new symbols 6 3 package definition 6 35 A 5 power symbol 4 27 schematic for hierarchical block 7 5 symbol 1 2 symbol by copying 6 5 title block 4 46 cross probing 11 21 Current Marker button 3 10 current sensor definition of Glossary 2 current stimulus source 8 7 custom libraries changing 4 18 configuring 6 48 customizing bill of materials report 11 14 cutting between pages 4 62 selected object 4 43 6 21 D default package types A 5 pin type 6 12 pin types 6 23 symbol attribute 4 18 view 7 13 defining connector package 11 5 gate names 6 41 hidden power and ground pins 6 27 number of gates 6 41 pin number assignments 6 42 pin types 6 23 shared power and ground pins 6 42 stimulus 8 7 definition AKO 11 26 model 4 4 package 4 4 11 6 Definition dialog box 6 3
299. your symbol such as free standing text pin names attribute names and values there are options to set the desired text size orientation horizontal justification and vertical justification Attribute Text You can change the text characteristics of any attributes of the symbol The text characteristic changes you make are only applied to the attribute that you are currently editing Changing attribute text characteristics 1 Double click the text to display the Change Attribute dialog box Change any of the characteristics of the text in the Display Characteristics frame of the dialog box as shown in Table 5 3 Name vaLu E Value fi k What to Display Value only Name only Both name and value Both name and value only if value defined C None Display Characteristics Orient horizontal Hiust refe Layer Atribute Text y Vjust noma gt Size 100 V r hangeable in schema l5 G Keep relative orientation Cancel 2 Click OK Table 5 3 Display Characteristics Changing Text Characteristics 5 13 Characteristic Explanation Orient Layer Size Hjust Vjust Enables you to position the text horizontally vertically upside down or down in relation to the defining point of the text string Specifies a text display level as defined by the Set Display Level function under the Options menu Defaults to Attribute Text Layer You can specify a user defined l

Schematics User's Guide - Del-UFMS

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents